Encompass®4 Reader System Guide

TransCore
3410 Midcourt Road, Suite 102
Carrollton, Texas 75006

January 2009
P/N 412066
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Information in this document is subject to change and does not represent a commitment on the part of
TC IP, Ltd.
©2009 TC IP, Ltd. All rights reserved. TRANSCORE, AMTECH, EGO, and ENCOMPASS are registered
trademarks of TC IP, Ltd., and are used under license. All other trademarks listed are the property of their
respective owners. Contents are subject to change. Printed in the U.S.A.

Products covered by this document are protected by one or more of the following U.S. patents 4,739,328;
4,782,345; 4,786,907; 4,816,839; 4,853,705; 4,864,158; 4,999,636; 5,030,807; 5,528,222; 5,550,547;
5,606,323; 5,673,037; 5,889,489; 5,912,632; 5,942,987; 6,097,347; 6,121,880; 6,275,157; 6,975,228; and
foreign equivalent patents. Other patents pending.

For further information, contact:

TransCore
3410 Midcourt Road, Suite 102
Carrollton, Texas 75006 USA

Phone: (214) 461-4031

Fax: (214) 461-6478

Technical Support

Web: transcore.com/rfidsupport

For comments or questions about this document, e-mail tech.pubs@transcore.com.

 WARNING TO USERS IN THE UNITED STATES

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC)

LOCATION AND MONITORING SERVICE STATEMENT
47 CFR §90.351

NOTE: The user is required to obtain a Part 90 site license from the FCC to operate this radio frequency
identification (RFID) device in the United States. See product label for FCC ID number. Access the FCC
Web site at www.fcc.gov/Forms/Form601/601.html for additional information concerning licensing
requirements.

NOTE: Users in all countries should check with the appropriate local authorities for licensing
requirements.
FCC RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
47 CFR §15.105(a)

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate RF energy and may cause harmful interference to radio communications if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual. Operating this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case, depending on the laws in effect, the user may be
required to correct the interference at their own expense.

NO UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATIONS
47 CFR §15.21

CAUTION: This equipment may not be modified, altered, or changed in any way without permission
from TransCore, LP. Unauthorized modification may void the equipment authorization from the FCC and
will void the TransCore warranty.

USE OF SHIELDED CABLES IS REQUIRED

47 CFR §15.27(a)

NOTE: Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to comply with FCC regulations.

TransCore, LP
USA
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Health Limits for Encompass 4 Reader Using

Integrated Antenna (902 to 928 MHz)
Within the United States, environmental guidelines regulating safe exposure lev-
els are issued by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
Section 1910.97 of OSHA Safety and Health Standards 2206 legislates a maxi-
mum safe exposure limit of 10 milliwatts per square centimeter (mW/cm2) aver-
aged over 6 minutes at 902 MHz.
Although not binding, other organizations such as the American National Stan-
dards Institute (ANSI) have issued similar guidelines that are more restrictive than
the OSHA limits (ANSI C95.1). ANSI guidelines recommend a maximum safe
power density in mW/cm2 of:
Frequency (in MHz)
1500
Thus, the maximum permissible exposure for general population/uncontrolled
exposure at 902 MHz is 0.60 mW/cm2. The power limit is a six-minute average.
The RF power density generated by the Encompass 4 Reader was calculated using
a maximum antenna gain of 9.5 dBi, equivalent to the antenna gain of the inte-
grated antenna.

Warning
At 2 W transmitted power and a distance of 19.3 inches (49 cm) from the reader,
the maximum power density calculated was less than 0.60 mW/cm2. Install the
reader at least 19.3 inches (49 cm) from the general public. Maintenance per-
sonnel must remain at least 8.66 inches (22 cm) from reader when system is
operating.

The data confirms that the TransCore Encompass 4 Reader effectively meets
OSHA requirements and thus does not represent an operating hazard to either the
general public or maintenance personnel.
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Health Limits for Encompass 4 Reader Using External

Antenna (902 to 928 MHz)
Within the United States, environmental guidelines regulating safe exposure levels are
issued by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
Section 1910.97 of OSHA Safety and Health Standards 2206 legislates a maximum
safe exposure limit of 10 milliwatts per square centimeter (mW/cm2) averaged over 6
minutes at 902 MHz.
Although not binding, other organizations such as the American National Standards
Institute (ANSI) have issued similar guidelines that are more restrictive than the
OSHA limits (ANSI C95.1). ANSI guidelines recommend a maximum safe power
density in mW/cm2 of:
Frequency (in MHz)
1500
Thus, the maximum permissible exposure for general population/uncontrolled expo-
sure at 902 MHz is 0.60 mW/cm2. The power limit is a six-minute average.
The RF power density generated by the Encompass 4 Reader was calculated using a
maximum antenna gain of 9.5 dBi, equivalent to the antenna gain of the external
antenna.

Warning
At 2 W transmitted power and a distance of 19.3 inches (49 cm) from the antenna,
the maximum power density calculated was less than 0.60 mW/cm2. Install the
antenna at least 19.3 inches (49 cm) from the general public. Maintenance person-
nel must remain at least 8.66 inches (22 cm) from antenna when system is operat-
ing.

The data confirms that the TransCore Encompass 4 Reader effectively meets OSHA
requirements and thus does not represent an operating hazard to either the general
public or maintenance personnel.
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide
Contents
 Contents

Health Limits for Encompass 4 Reader Using Integrated Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Health Limits for Encompass 4 Reader Using External Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v

1 Introduction

Purpose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

System Guide Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Typographical Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
How It Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Licensing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

2 Developing the Site Plan

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Reading of Mixed Population Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Reader and Tag Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Polarization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Unobstructed Line of Sight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Antenna Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

AA3100 Yagi (without radome) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
AA3101 Yagi (with radome). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
AA3110 Parapanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
AA3140 PCB Log Periodic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
AA3152 Universal Toll Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
AA3153 Toll Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Antenna and Tag Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Polarization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Unobstructed Line of Sight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
ix
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Site Layout and Traffic Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

The Encompass 4 Reader Read Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Other Encompass 4 Readers in the Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Lane Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Gate with Center Island Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Parking Garage with Ticket Island Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Overhead Reader Installation Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Lane Configurations for Encompass 4 Readers Using an External Antenna . . . . 2-15
Reflection, Refraction, and Diffraction of RF Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Existing Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Electrical and Communications Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Junction Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Power and Communications Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Electrical Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Power Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Host Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
RS–232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
RS–422 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Wiegand Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Input/Output Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Antenna Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

3 Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

Compatible Tag Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Reader and Tag Model Interoperability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
TransCore’s eGo Plus Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
eGo Plus Sticker Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
eGo Plus License Plate Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
TransCore’s eGo Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
eGo Windshield Sticker Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
eGo License Plate Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Installing eGo Plus Sticker Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Positioning eGo Plus Sticker Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Mirror Post Attached on Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Mirror Post Attached on Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Large Truck with No Inside Mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
eGo Plus Sticker Tag Installation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Removing eGo Plus Sticker Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Installing eGo Plus Security Sticker Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Removing eGo Plus Security Sticker Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

x
 Contents

Installing eGo Plus License Plate Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Positioning eGo Plus License Plate Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
eGo Plus LPT Installation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Installing eGo Windshield Sticker Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Positioning eGo Windshield Sticker Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Mirror Post Attached Low On Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Mirror Post Attached High on Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Mirror Post Attached to Headliner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Mounting the eGo Windshield Sticker Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Removing eGo Windshield Sticker Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Installing eGo LPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Installing Interior ATA Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Positioning ATA Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Interior Driver’s or Passenger’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Interior Center Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
ATA Interior Tag Installation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Removing Interior ATA Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Installing ATA License Plate Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Positioning ATA License Plate Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
ATA License Plate Tag Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Types of Bumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Alternate Mounting Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Installation Procedures Using Tape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Installation Procedures Using Blind Rivets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Removing Exterior Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

4 Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

Installation Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Materials Supplied by TransCore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Contents of Shipping Carton. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Installation Accessory Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Additional Materials Needed for Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

xi
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Pre-installation Testing of the Encompass 4 Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Testing the Encompass 4 Reader Using an Audible Circuit Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Connecting the Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Connecting the AC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Connecting the DC Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Connecting Communications for Bench Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Connecting for Bench Testing with RS–232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Connecting the Encompass 4 Reader Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Connecting for Bench Testing with RS–422 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Bench Testing the Encompass 4 Reader Before Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Mounting the Encompass 4 Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Mounting the Encompass 4 Reader on a Round Pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Required Materials To Be Supplied by Customer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Mounting the Encompass 4 Reader to a Wall or Flat Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Mounting the Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Mounting the Antenna Curb-Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Mounting the Antenna Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Connecting the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Connecting Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Connecting the Encompass 4 Reader to the PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
RS–232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Connecting the Encompass 4 Reader Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . 4-24
RS–422 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Wiegand Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Connecting Sense Input and Sense Output Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Sense Input Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Sense Output Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Marking the Read Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

5 General Software Information

Command Entry Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Command Response Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

xii
 Contents

Operating Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Power Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Program Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Download Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Download Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Sign-On Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Boot Failure Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Tag/Message Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

6 Communications Protocols

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Basic Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Error Correcting Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Basic Protocol and ECP Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Reader Transmissions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
ECP Host ACK/NAK Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Switch to Command Mode Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Host Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Reader Command Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Sample Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Reader Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Host Command Transmissions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Timing and Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Reader-Addressed Failure Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Illegal Sequence Number (not in the range 0–9, A–F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Wrong Sequence Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Incorrect CRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Illegal Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Transmission Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Receive Timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Asynchronous Message/Command Message Collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Host-Addressed Failure Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Illegal or Wrong Sequence Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Incorrect CRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Transmission Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Receive Timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Asynchronous Message/Command Message Collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

xiii
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

ECP Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

CRC Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

Manually Disabling ECP for Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

7 Commands

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Data Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Command Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Download Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Reader Mode Control — Command Group 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
00 Switch to Data Mode (Factory Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
01 Switch to Command Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
06 Transmit Buffer Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Communications Port Control — Command Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
100N Select Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
101N Select Stop Bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
102N Select Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Command Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
20 Set Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
21 Set Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
22 Display Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Append Information — Command Group 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
30N Append Time and Date Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
31N Append Auxiliary Information Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
ID Filtering — Command Group 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
40 Transmit All ID Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
410N Select Unique ID Code Criteria (Anti-passback Feature) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
420N Select Valid ID Code Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
43 Buffer All ID Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
440 Reset Uniqueness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
44N Set Uniqueness Timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
450 Disable Wiegand Mode (Factory Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
451 Enable Wiegand Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
452 Disable Tag Translation Mode (Factory Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
453 Enable Tag Translation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
454 Disable Multi-tag Sort (Factory Default). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
455 Enable Multi-tag Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
456 Enable eGo Plus Tag Initialization During Multi-tag Sort (Factory Default) 7-14
457 Disable eGo Plus Tag Initialization During Multi-tag Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
458 Disable Second Alternate Group Select (Factory Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
459 Enable Second Alternate Group Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
46NN Set Wiegand Retransmit Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
480 Disable ATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
xiv
 Contents

481 Enable ATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

482 Disable eGo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
483 Enable eGo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
484 Disable SeGo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
485 Enable SeGo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
486 Disable IAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
487 Enable IAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
488 Disable eATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
489 Enable eATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
490 Disable Third Alternate Group Select (Factory Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
491 Enable Third Alternate Group Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
492 Disable Fourth Alternate Group Select (Factory Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
493 Enable Fourth Alternate Group Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
494 Disable Fifth Alternate Group Select (Factory Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
495 Enable Fifth Alternate Group Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
496 Disable Alternate Group Select (Factory Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
497 Enable Alternate Group Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Reader Status — Command Group 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
505 Display Software Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
506 Display Hardware Configuration Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
510 Display RF Transceiver FPGA Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
511 Display RF Transceiver I Filter Chip Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
512 Display RF Transceiver Q Filter Chip Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
513 Display DSP Board Actel Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
520 Display Power Fail Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
521 Display Reader ID Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
522 Display Communications Port Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
524 Display Appended Information Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
525 Display Communications Protocol Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
526 Display I/O Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
527 Display RF Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
529 Display Presence Input Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
530 Display RF0 Filter Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
532 Display Wiegand Mode Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
533 Display Wiegand Retransmit Interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
534 Display Tag Translation Mode Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
535 Display Buffer Control Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
536 Display Dual-Frame Processing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
537 Display Echo Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
540 Display Flash Checksum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
543 Display Boot Checksum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
550 Display Periodic Check Tag Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
551 Display Selected Check Tag Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
560 Request Sensor Status Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
570 Display Operating Mode Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
577 Report Buffered Handshakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Reader Control Functions — Command Group 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
60NN Set Reader ID Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
610 Select Basic Communication Protocol (Factory Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30

xv
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

611 Select Error Correcting Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30

612NN Select Error Correcting Protocol Timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
613 Enable Data Inquiry Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
614N Select Flow Control Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
6160 Disable Buffer Control Mode (Factory Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
6161 Enable Buffer Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Buffer Control Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
6170 Disable Echo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
6171 Enable Echo Mode (Factory Default). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
620N Set Output Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
621 Select Predefined Output Control (Factory Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
63 Reset Reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
640N RF Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
641 Select RF-by-Input Control (Factory Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
642NN Select RF Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
643NN Select ATA Operating Range (Distance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
644NN Set RF Attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
645NN Set eGo and eGo Plus Operating Range (Distance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
646XX Set IAG RF Attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
647XXX Select RF Operating Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
65 Reset Power Fail Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
66F Load Default Operating Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
67N Set Output Pulse Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
690N Select Presence Without Tag Report Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
692N Select RF Control Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
693N Select RF Timeout Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
694N Select Input Inversion Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
695S...S Set Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
696S...S Store Hardware Configuration String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Auxiliary Reader Control — Command Group 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
82N Select Input Status Change Report Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
830 Disable Automatic Periodic RF Status Report (Factory Default) . . . . . . . . 7-45
831 Enable Automatic Periodic RF Status Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

8 Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader

Configuring the Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

General Configuration Labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Default Operating Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Configuring Parameters with Terminal Emulation Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Starting the Terminal Emulation Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Verifying Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Verifying Tag Read Capability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Configuring Encompass 4 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Appended Tag Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
ID Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

xvi
 Contents

Reset Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Radio Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
RF Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Vehicle Detector Controlling RF Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Host Controlling RF Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Continuous RF Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Sense Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Sense Output Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Serial Port Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Port Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Communications Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Software Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Fine-Tuning and Verifying the Read Zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Physically Orienting the Encompass 4 Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Physically Orienting the Encompass 4 Reader Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Fine-Tuning the Read Zone by Lowering Output Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Fine-tuning the Read Zone by Adjusting Sensitivity Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

9 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Encompass 4 Reader Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Marketing Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Find a Problem with the Encompass 4 Reader or Have Suggestions? . . . . . . . . 9-7

A Glossary

B Technical Specifications

Reader Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Physical Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Environmental Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

xvii
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

C Wiring Tables

Communications Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

Cable Supplied with the Encompass 4 Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4

RS–232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
RS–422 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Wiegand Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7

Power Supply Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7

AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Low-Voltage DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8

Input/Output Cabling Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9

Summary Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12

D Command Quick Reference

Command Syntax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

Factory Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

Numerical Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5

Alphabetical Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17

E Compatible Tag Information

Tag Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3

Tag Data Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6

xviii
 Contents

List of Figures
Figure 1-1 Encompass 4 Reader System Front and Side Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Figure 2-1 Tag and Reader Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Figure 2-2 Encompass 4 Reader Location Relative to Tag Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Figure 2-3 Typical Tag Positions for U.S. Driver’s Side Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Figure 2-4 Typical Tag Positions for U.S. Passenger’s Side Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Figure 2-5 Typical Tag Positions Used with Overhead Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Figure 2-6 Gate Application with Center Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Figure 2-7 Parking Garage Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Figure 2-8 Overhead Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Figure 3-1 eGo Plus Windshield Sticker Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Figure 3-2 eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Figure 3-3 eGo Plus License Plate Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Figure 3-4 eGo Windshield Sticker Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Figure 3-5 eGo License Plate Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Figure 3-6 eGo Plus Sticker Tag Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Figure 3-7 eGo Plus Sticker Tag Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Figure 3-8 eGo Plus Sticker Tag Placement in Large Truck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Figure 3-9 Applying eGo Plus Sticker Tag to Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Figure 3-10 Second Step of eGo Plus Sticker Tag Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Figure 3-11 Applying eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag to Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Figure 3-12 Second Step of eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Figure 3-13 Correct Mounting Location for LPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Figure 3-14 Correct Tag Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Figure 3-15 Upper Placement Over the Top Area of the License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Figure 3-16 eGo Windshield Sticker Tag Placement Option A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Figure 3-17 eGo Windshield Sticker Tag Placement Option B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Figure 3-18 eGo Windshield Sticker Tag Placement Option C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Figure 3-19 Driver’s or Passenger’s Side (U.S.) Interior Windshield Tag Location . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Figure 3-20 Upper Center Interior Windshield Tag Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Figure 3-21 Hook-and-Loop Material on Interior Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Figure 3-22 Proper Tag Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Figure 3-23 Correct Exterior Tag Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Figure 3-24 Upper Placement In License Plate Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Figure 3-25 Obstruction-Free Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Figure 3-26 Spacer Positioned Behind Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Figure 3-27 Exterior Tag with Double-Sided Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Figure 4-1 Wiring for Audible Circuit Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Figure 4-2 Back of Encompass 4 Reader Showing Antenna Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Figure 4-3 Pin Assignments for Signal to Host Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Figure 4-4 Back of the Encompass 4 Reader (reader shown has integrated antenna) . . . . . . 4-13
Figure 4-5 Factory-Mounted Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Figure 4-6 Pole-Mount Bracket Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Figure 4-7 The Encompass 4 Reader Attached to the Pole Mount Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Figure 4-8 Front and Top Views of the Encompass 4 Reader Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Figure 4-9 Wall Mount Bracket Accessory (part number 54-1620-001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Figure 4-10 Wall Mount Bracket Attached to the Encompass 4 Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Figure 4-11 Factory-Mounted Bracket Attached to Wall Mount Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

xix
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Figure 4-12 Pole Mount Bracket Attached to Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18

Figure 4-13 Connecting the Encompass 4 Assembly to Pole Mount Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19
Figure 4-14 Front and Top Views of the Curb-Side Antenna Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21
Figure 4-15 Encompass 4 Reader Installation with Overhead Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Figure 4-16 Sample Circuit Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Figure 4-17 Sample Read Zone Marking Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Figure 8-1 Connection Description Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Figure 8-2 Phone Number Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Figure 8-3 COM 1 Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Figure 8-4 Hyper Terminal Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Figure 8-5 Sign-on Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Figure 8-6 Successful Tag Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Figure 8-7 Second Successful Tag Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Figure 8-8 Encompass 4 Reader RF Control Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Figure C-1 DB9 and DB25 Connector Pin Assignments for Signal to Host. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4

xx
 Contents

List of Tables
Table 1-1 Typographical Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Table 2-1 Examples of Staggered Reader Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Table 2-2 Connector Cabling Accessory Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Table 2-3 Power Supply Current Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Table 2-4 Recommended Cable Length from Transformer to the Encompass 4 Reader . . . . 2-18
Table 2-5 Communications Interfaces and Conductor Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Table 2-6 Reader to Antenna Cable Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Table 3-1 Tags Read by the Encompass 4 Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Table 3-2 eGo Plus Tag Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Table 3-3 eGo Tag Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Table 4-1 Installation Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Table 4-2 AC Transformer Connections for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Table 4-3 Low Voltage DC Cable Connections for the Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Table 4-4 RS–232 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Table 4-5 Commands for Bench Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Table 4-6 RS–232 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Table 4-7 RS–422 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Table 4-8 Wiegand Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Table 4-9 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Table 5-1 Four-Character Command Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Table 5-2 Sample Command Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Table 7-1 Select Baud Rate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Table 7-2 Select Stop Bits Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Table 7-3 Select Parity Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Table 7-4 Append Time and Date Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Table 7-5 Append Auxiliary Information Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Table 7-6 Unique ID Code Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Table 7-7 Select Valid Code Commands and Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Table 7-8 Open/Closed Conditions for Output Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Table 7-9 Open/Closed Conditions for Input Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Table 7-10 Flow Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Table 7-11 Output Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Table 7-12 RF Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Table 7-13 RF Frequency Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Table 7-14 RF Attenuation Command Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Table 7-15 Select RF Frequency Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Table 7-16 Output Pulse Duration Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Table 7-17 Presence Without Tag Report Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Table 7-18 RF Control Algorithm Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Table 7-19 Timeout Period Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Table 7-20 Input Inversion Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Table 7-21 Input Status Change Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Table 8-1 Encompass 4 Reader Configuration Label Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Table 8-2 Encompass 4 Reader Default Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Table 8-3 Command Sequence to Verify Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Table 9-1 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Table 9-2 Symptoms and Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Table C-1 Communications Interfaces and Conductor Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3

xxi
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table C-2 RS–232 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Table C-3 RS–232 Interface Signal Wiring for Alternate Wire Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Table C-4 RS–422 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Table C-5 RS–422 Interface Signal Wiring for Alternate Wire Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Table C-6 Wiegand Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Table C-7 Wiegand Interface Signal Wiring for Alternate Wire Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Table C-8 AC Transformer Connections for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Table C-9 AC Transformer Connections for Alternate Wire Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
Table C-10 Low Voltage DC Cable Connections for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
Table C-11 Low Voltage DC Cable Connections for Alternate Wire Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
Table C-12 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . C-9
Table C-13 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments for Alternate Wire Cable . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
Table C-14 All Cabling Assignments for Colored-Wire Pair Cable or Alternate Wire Cable. . . C-12
Table D-1 Encompass 4 Reader Default Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Table D-2 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Numerically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Table D-3 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Alphabetically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17
Table E-1 SeGo Protocol Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
Table E-2 eGo Protocol Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
Table E-3 ATA Protocol Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4

xxii
 1
Introduction
 Chapter 1
Introduction

This chapter is the introduction to this manual and provides information

pertaining to the audience, organization, document conventions, system
description, and license information for the Encompass® 4 Reader
System.

Purpose
This guide provides site planning and testing, installing, and operating instructions for
TransCore’s Encompass 4 Reader System, a dual-protocol reader that reads TransCore
Super eGo® (SeGo), Intellitag®-based eGo, American Trucking Associations (ATA)/
International Organization for Standardization (ISO), and Inter-Agency Group (IAG)
tag protocols. Before you begin installing the Encompass 4 Reader System, TransCore
recommends that you read this entire manual.

Audience
This document is intended to be used by authorized TransCore Encompass 4 Reader
System dealers, installers, and service personnel. Because the Encompass 4 Reader
System has no operator- or end-user serviceable components or features, no end-user
manual or operator guide exists. Once the system is set up and tested by the
authorized installer, Encompass 4 Reader System operation requires no end-user
intervention.

System Guide Organization

Note: TransCore offers the Encompass 4 Reader in two models: one with an inte-
grated antenna and one that requires connection to an external antenna. In this system
guide, information and instructions for both Encompass 4 Reader models are pre-
sented. Where separate instructions dictate, a section detailing one Encompass 4
Reader model is followed immediately with a section detailing the other reader model.
In this system guide, the reader with an integrated antenna is listed first. In cases
where the information does not warrant a separate section, the addition of "...or
antenna" distinguishes between the Encompass 4 Reader models.
The chapters of this guide and a description of the contents are listed below.
• Chapter 1, “Introduction,” explains the purpose and describes the audience for the
guide, outlines the manual’s organization, provides a brief description of the
Encompass 4 Reader system, and discusses Federal Communications Commis-
sion (FCC) licensing requirements.

1-3
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

• Chapter 2, “Developing the Site Plan,” discusses factors to be considered when

developing the site plan and before ordering equipment and installing the Encom-
pass 4 Reader System. These considerations include reader or antenna and tag
alignment, site layout and traffic flow, and electrical and communications require-
ments.
• Chapter 3, “Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags,” contains information on
compatible tag models and provides procedures for installing tags onto, and
removing tags from, vehicles that use the facility where the Encompass 4 Reader
System is installed.
• Chapter 4, “Installing the Encompass 4 Reader System,” lists the materials needed
and provides procedures to install the Encompass 4 Reader System. Steps include:
• Pre-testing
• Installing the Encompass 4 Reader System on a round pole or flat surface
• Connecting power and communications
• Marking the read zone.
• Chapter 5, “General Software Information,” and Chapter 6, “Communications
Protocols,” provide reference information on various software-related topics and
communications protocols.
• Chapter 7, “Commands,” discusses the host-transmitted commands that are used
to control Encompass 4 Reader System configuration and operation.
• Chapter 8, “Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader System,” provides procedures
for configuring and fine-tuning the Encompass 4 Reader System after installing it
at the site.
• Chapter 9, “Troubleshooting and Maintenance,” answers the most commonly
asked questions about installing and maintaining the Encompass 4 Reader Sys-
tem.
• Appendix A, “Glossary,” contains frequently used terms.

• Appendix B, “Technical Specifications,” provides the Encompass 4 Reader Sys-

tem specifications.
• Appendix C, “Wiring Tables,” shows the wiring connections for the communica-
tions interfaces, electrical cable connections, and the external interface signal wir-
ing.
• Appendix D, “Command Quick Reference,” lists the Encompass 4 Reader System
factory default configuration settings and provides host software commands in
numerical and alphabetical order.
• Appendix E, “Compatible Tag Information,” provides helpful information about
tags that are compatible with the Encompass 4 Reader System.
• Index provides an alphabetical listing of guide topics.

1-4
 Introduction

Typographical Conventions
The conventions listed in Table 1-1 are used in this manual:

Table 1-1 Typographical Conventions

Convention Indication

Concerns about a procedure.

Code Code, including keywords and variables within text and as

separate paragraphs, and user-defined program elements
within text appear in courier typeface.

Dialog Box Title Title of a dialog box as it appears on screen.

Menu Item Appears on a menu. Capitalization follows the interface.

Note Auxiliary information that further clarifies the current

discussion. These important points require the user’s
attention. The paragraph is in italics and the word Note is
bold.

NUL Zero-value ASCII character or a zero-value byte.

NULL Zero-value pointers. Null-terminated string refers to strings

of printable ASCII characters with a zero-value byte placed
in memory directly after the last printable character of the
string.

This procedure might cause harm to the equipment and/or

the user.

System Description
The Encompass 4 Reader System is a dual-protocol reader supporting the low-cost,
high-performance SeGo radio frequency identification (RFID) technology. SeGo tech-
nology provides the capability to read miniature RFID tags in a myriad of options
including rugged, durable, or thin flexible forms such as the eGo Plus Sticker Tag. The
Encompass 4 Reader System also supports legacy transportation applications such as
gated toll, parking, or security gate access and is designed to be compatible with exist-
ing TransCore SmartPass® parking access control applications certified for licensed
use. The Encompass 4 Reader System also supports the TransCore eGo and TransCore
ATA/ISO tag types, as well as the IAG tag protocol.

1-5
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

The Encompass 4 Reader System is a high-power unit that can read both half-frame
and full-frame tags. The reader output power can be adjusted using reader commands.

Reader
The Encompass 4 Reader System consists of an input/output (I/O) module, a power
supply, a reader logic board (also called a tag decoder), a radio frequency (RF) trans-
mitter/receiver (called the RF module), and a patch antenna.
A second version of the Encompass 4 Reader is designed to be used with a high-per-
formance external antenna. These Encompass 4 Reader System components are con-
tained in a highly reliable, compact, and easy-to-install environmentally-sealed
package. Figure 1-1 shows the front and side views of an Encompass 4 Reader Sys-
tem.

Figure 1-1 Encompass 4 Reader System Front and Side Views

Tags
The Encompass 4 Reader System has the capability to read TransCore SeGo protocol
tags, the Intellitag-based eGo protocol tags, TransCore ATA protocol, and TransCore
ISO-compliant read-only full- and half-frame tags, as well as IAG protocol tags.

How It Works
The Encompass 4 Reader System directs the RF module to generate an RF signal,
which is broadcast through the integrated or external antenna. Entering the Encompass
4 Reader System’s reading range, a TransCore RFID tag installed on a vehicle or other
object to be tracked adds its programmed identification information to the signal and
reflects the signal back to the Encompass 4 Reader System. The Encompass 4 Reader
System receives this modified, or modulated signal, and decodes the tag data carried
by the reflected signal and transmits this data to a local host computer for processing.

1-6
 Introduction

Licensing Requirements
An FCC license provides the user with the legal authorization to operate the Encom-
pass 4 on the licensed frequencies at the site specified in the license. Only an autho-
rized installer or service technician can set the RF frequency of the Encompass 4
Reader System to the frequency specified in the FCC site license. No end-user-oper-
ated controls exist on the Encompass 4 Reader System.
The FCC license may provide the user with protection and authorization to maintain
the system should any other RFID product be used in the licensed area after the
Encompass 4 equipment is installed.
Users of the Encompass 4 Reader System in the United States must obtain a license
from the FCC. In the United States, the authorized modulated frequency band for this
product is 911.75 to 919.75 MHz and the authorized continuous wave frequency band
is 902.25 to 903.75 MHz and 910.00 to 921.50 MHz.
The user is responsible for filing the FCC license according to FCC regulations, but
the TransCore dealer will provide assistance and support as necessary to complete
these forms. Forms are available online at the FCC internet site http://wire-
less.fcc.gov/uls. For further information on obtaining the license contact TransCore.

Technical Support
Authorized dealers and distributors are responsible for the direct support of all
customers. Authorized dealers and distributors needing technical support can contact:
Technical Support
Web: transcore.com/rfidsupport

or

TransCore
3410 Midcourt Road, Suite 102
Carrollton, Texas 75006 USA
Phone: (214) 461-4031
Fax: (214) 461-6478
Please be prepared to answer a series of questions that are designed to direct you to the
best support resource available.

1-7
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

1-8
 2
Developing the Site Plan
 Chapter 2
Developing the Site Plan

This chapter discusses site plan development for installing the

Encompass® 4 Reader System.

Overview
Note: In this section, unless specifically stated, "Encompass 4 Reader" applies
both to the Encompass 4 Reader with integrated antenna and Encompass 4
Reader with external antenna.
Developing a site plan provides the foundation for the site’s system design and estab-
lishes the following system configuration parameters:
• Number and general location of primary components

• Number of different radio frequencies required

Gathering relevant site information is crucial before applying for Federal Communi-
cations Commission (FCC) approval and ordering and installing Encompass 4
Reader(s) and tags.
Also, consider the following factors when developing a site plan:
• Type of tags used in the facility

• Reader and/or antenna and tag alignment

• Site layout and traffic flow

• Encompass 4 Reader and/or antenna mounting requirements

• Encompass 4 Reader electrical requirements

• Encompass 4 Reader communications requirements

These factors provide relevant information regarding each site’s physical and electro-
magnetic environment and the conditions under which the system must perform.

Reading of Mixed Population Tags

The Encompass 4 Reader reads TransCore’s Super eGo® (SeGo) protocol tags, the
American Trucking Association (ATA) and International Organization for Standard-
ization (ISO) read-only tags, whether powered by battery or beam, application-spe-
cific integrated circuit (ASIC)-based tags with Intellitag technology, or Inter-Agency

2-3
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Group (IAG) tags. The reader can read the ATA or ISO read-only tags in the presence
of Intellitag-based tags; however, attempting to read an Intellitag-based tag in the
presence of an ATA or ISO read-only tag is not recommended.

Caution
Attempting to read an Intellitag-based tag in the presence of an ATA or ISO read-only
tag may provide unreliable results.
The factors that influence the readability include, but are not limited to physical orien-
tation and configuration, type of read-only tag, ratio of backscatter cross-section of the
tags, and whether the tag is battery- or beam-powered.

Reader and Tag Alignment

The position of the Encompass 4 Reader and placement of the tag on the vehicle must
be compatible. Also, consider any existing tagged vehicles now using the facility to
determine the optimal Encompass 4 Reader location and orientation at the site.
Note: If any of the vehicles using your facility already have tags, such as those used
in toll applications, contact TransCore for information about mixed-tag installations
before you plan tag type, location, and programming.

Three primary criteria must be satisfied to achieve the highest read reliability:
• Polarization of the tag and the Encompass 4 Reader must be aligned in the same
direction — both horizontal.
• The installed tag must be in a direct, unobstructed line of sight to the Encompass 4
Reader.
• Tags designed to be mounted in a vehicle windshield must be mounted in the vehi-
cle’s windshield, and tags designed to be mounted on the exterior surface of the
vehicle must be mounted on the exterior surface of the vehicle.

Caution
A tag may not be reliably read unless the preceding criteria are met.

2-4
 Developing the Site Plan

Polarization
The polarization of the tag must be aligned in the same direction as the Encompass
4 Reader, as shown in Figure 2-1.
Note: Matching the tag and antenna polarization is critical to obtain optimal system
performance.

Figure 2-1 Tag and Reader Orientation

2-5
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Unobstructed Line of Sight

For optimum readability, install the Encompass 4 Reader and the vehicle’s tag so that
when the vehicle approaches the Encompass 4 Reader, the tag is directly facing the
reader and the line of sight is clear between the Encompass 4 Reader and the tag. If a
fence or barrier is between the tag and the reader, the Encompass 4 Reader cannot reli-
ably read the tags. Figure 2-2 illustrates possible installation locations of an Encom-
pass 4 Reader in relation to a tag’s mounting location on a vehicle. If the tags are not
in the recommended location, reliable optimum operation requires lower vehicle
speeds.

Figure 2-2 Encompass 4 Reader Location Relative to Tag Position

2-6
 Developing the Site Plan

If the Encompass 4 Reader is installed on a pole or wall to the left of the vehicle, opti-
mal tag position is on the left side of the vehicle as illustrated in Figure 2-3.

Figure 2-3 Typical Tag Positions for U.S. Driver’s Side Reader
If an Encompass 4 Reader is installed on a pole or wall to the right of the vehicle, opti-
mal tag position is on the right side of the vehicle as illustrated in Figure 2-4.

Figure 2-4 Typical Tag Positions for U.S. Passenger’s Side Reader

2-7
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

If the Encompass 4 Reader is installed in an overhead location, optimal tag position is

in the top center of the windshield in the area behind the rear view mirror or on the
vehicle’s front license plate or center bumper as illustrated in Figure 2-5.

Figure 2-5 Typical Tag Positions Used with Overhead Reader

Note: Metallized coatings on some vehicle windshields and windows shield the RF
energy emitted by the Encompass 4 Reader and may cause tags to be misread. Many
metallized windshields have areas that are not metallized in which the tag can be
placed and reasonable results achieved. If there are no openings in the metallized
coating in which to install an interior tag, install exterior-type tags on the exterior of
the vehicle.

Refer to Chapter 3 “Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags” for more detailed
information on tag positioning.

Antenna Selection
This section contains guidelines that assist in antenna selection for an Encompass
4 Reader installation that uses an external antenna. The following antennas are com-
patible with the Encompass 4 Reader installation.

AA3100 Yagi (without radome)

Appropriate for installations with the following requirements and conditions:
• 902 to 928 MHz operation
• Non-icing environments
• Relatively symmetrical reading range
• Antenna profile not a major consideration
2-8
 Developing the Site Plan

AA3101 Yagi (with radome)

Appropriate for installations with the following requirements and conditions:
• 902 to 928 MHz operation

• Exposure to harsh environments

• Relatively symmetrical reading range

• Antenna profile not a major consideration

AA3110 Parapanel
Appropriate for installations with the following requirements and conditions:
• 902 to 928 MHz operation

• Exposure to harsh environments

• Broad radiation pattern in one dimension, narrow in the other

• Low antenna profile

• Horizontal polarization

AA3140 PCB Log Periodic

Appropriate for installations with the following requirements and conditions:
• 845 to 950 MHz operation

• Exposure to harsh environments

• Maximum coverage at close range (<20 ft [6.1 m])

• Vertical or horizontal polarization

AA3152 Universal Toll Antenna

Appropriate for installations with the following requirements and conditions:
• 902 to 928 MHz operation
• Exposure to harsh environments

• Broadcast pattern of similar size and shape in both horizontal and vertical planes

• Low antenna profile

Note: Do not use an AA3152 Universal Toll Antenna for side-fire application.

2-9
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

AA3153 Toll Antenna

Appropriate for installations with the following requirements and conditions:
• 902 to 928 MHz operation

• Exposure to harsh environments

• Broadcast pattern with virtually no side or back lobes, which helps confine cover-
age to a single lane width
• Low antenna profile

Antenna and Tag Alignment

The position of the antenna connected to the Encompass 4 Reader and placement of
the tag on the vehicle must be compatible. Also, consider any existing tagged vehicles
now using the facility to determine the optimal Encompass 4 Reader antenna location
and orientation at the site.
Note: If any of the vehicles using your facility already have tags, such as those used
in toll applications, contact TransCore for information about mixed-tag installations
before you plan tag type, location, and programming.

Three primary criteria must be satisfied to achieve the highest read reliability:
• Polarization of the tag and the Encompass 4 Reader antenna must be aligned hori-
zontally.
• The installed tag must be in a direct, unobstructed line of sight to the Encompass 4
Reader antenna.
• Tags designed to be mounted in a vehicle windshield must be mounted in the vehi-
cle’s windshield, and tags designed to be mounted on the exterior surface of the
vehicle must be mounted on the exterior surface of the vehicle.

Caution
A tag may not be reliably read unless the preceding criteria are met.

Polarization
The polarization of the tag must be aligned in the same direction as the antenna con-
nected to the Encompass 4 Reader.
Note: Matching the tag and antenna polarization is critical to obtain optimal system
performance.

2-10
 Developing the Site Plan

Unobstructed Line of Sight

For optimum readability, install the Encompass 4 Reader antenna and the vehicle’s tag
so that when the vehicle approaches the antenna, the tag is directly facing the antenna
and the line of sight is clear between the antenna and the tag. If a fence or barrier is
between the tag and the antenna, the antenna cannot reliably read the tags. Figure 2-2
illustrates possible installation locations of an Encompass 4 Reader antenna in relation
to a tag’s mounting location on a vehicle. If the tags are not in the recommended loca-
tion, reliable optimum operation requires lower vehicle speeds.

Site Layout and Traffic Flow

The following site layout and traffic flow considerations are critical when determining
Encompass 4 Reader installation locations:
• The Encompass 4 Reader read zone

• Other Encompass 4 Reader units and antennas in the area

• Lane configurations
• Reflection, refraction, and diffraction of RF signals

• Existing signal interference at the site

The Encompass 4 Reader Read Zone

The Encompass 4 Reader must be able to read the tag data properly within a specified
area, called the read zone, without reading other nearby tags or interfering with other
Encompass 4 Readers at the site. The following are some of the factors that affect the
size and shape of the read zone:
• Mounting method used (pole or wall mount)

• Mounting location (overhead or side mount)

• Height from the ground and mounting angle

• Mounting method used (pole or wall mount) of the antenna

• Mounting location (overhead or side mount) of the antenna

• Height from the ground and mounting angle of the antenna

• Indoor or outdoor location

• RF output attenuation

• Range discrimination setting

• Other sources of interference and reflection

2-11
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

The Encompass 4 Reader must be positioned to allow the RF signal to travel to and
return from the tags within the designated range and be placed in an area where it is
not likely to be bumped out of alignment. If the antenna becomes misaligned or some
nearby structure is added or removed, system operation can be seriously affected.
The external antenna must be positioned to allow the RF signal to travel to and return
from the tags within the designated range and be placed in an area where it is not
likely to be bumped out of alignment. If the antenna becomes misaligned or some
nearby structure is added or removed, system operation can be seriously affected.
For instructions on setting the read zone, see “Fine-Tuning and Verifying the Read
Zone” on page 8-19.

Other Encompass 4 Readers in the Area

Sites with more than one Encompass 4 Reader in proximity should have them config-
ured with a frequency separation of at least 2 MHz from adjacent readers. If more than
one Encompass 4 Reader is in a side-by-side or multiple lane application, the frequen-
cies should be staggered. Also, Encompass 4 Readers may not operate accurately if
they directly face each other or are positioned back-to-back.
If more than one Encompass 4 Reader and antenna is in a side-by-side or multiple lane
application, the frequencies should be staggered. Also, Encompass 4 Readers may not
operate accurately if the antennas directly face each other or are positioned back-to-
back. Table 2-2 shows examples of staggered reader frequencies in a site with up to 14
readers.

Table 2-1 Examples of Staggered Reader Frequencies

Lane Number Reader Frequency Lane Number Reader Frequency

1 912.5 2 915

3 917.5 4 913.5

5 916 6 918.5

7 914.5 8 917

9 913 10 915.5

11 918 12 914

13 916.5 14 919

Lane Configurations
TransCore recommends that traffic be guided through a controlled lane to consistently
obtain accurate tag readings and to prevent physical damage to the Encompass 4
Reader. The following subsections describe some common lane configurations and
offer suggestions for positioning the Encompass 4 Reader within the controlled traffic
flow.

2-12
 Developing the Site Plan

Gate with Center Island Configuration

Figure 2-6 illustrates a typical gate application with the Encompass 4 Reader units
positioned on a center island to read tags mounted on the inside windshield on the
driver’s side (United States). The readers are placed to allow time for the gate to open
so the vehicle can roll through without stopping while not allowing room for an
untagged vehicle to be between the vehicle being read and the gate.

Figure 2-6 Gate Application with Center Island

2-13
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Parking Garage with Ticket Island Configuration

Figure 2-7 illustrates a parking garage application with each Encompass 4 Reader
mounted on the ticket island to read tags mounted on the inside center windshield or
on the center front vehicle bumper. The Encompass 4 Reader placement may require
the vehicle to stop before the gate opens.

Figure 2-7 Parking Garage Application

Overhead Reader Installation Configuration

Another option for Encompass 4 Reader placement is to mount it overhead in each
lane as illustrated in Figure 2-8. This illustration assumes that tags are mounted on the
inside center windshield or center bumper of the vehicle.

2-14
 Developing the Site Plan

Figure 2-8 Overhead Installation

Lane Configurations for Encompass 4 Readers

Using an External Antenna
TransCore recommends that traffic be guided through a controlled lane to consistently
obtain accurate tag readings and to prevent physical damage to the Encompass 4
Reader and antenna.

Reflection, Refraction, and Diffraction of RF

Signals
RF signals can be reflected, refracted, or diffracted by metal objects, walls, and even
wet pavement or ice. Any of these factors can alter or degrade system performance.
When designing your site plan, you must consider permanent structures and transient
factors in the vicinity that may affect RF signals being generated by the Encompass 4
Reader. Permanent structures include buildings, chain link fences, guard shacks, and
gates. Transient factors include passing traffic and local weather conditions, such as
rain or snow. Symptoms of reflection, refraction, and diffraction include reading tags
that are out of the desired read zone or tags being read from another lane.
The most common RF reflectors are metallic surfaces. RF signals may also be par-
tially reflected by nonconducting materials such as dirt, wood, ice, asphalt, and con-
crete. When nonconducting materials in the system environment become wet, they
increase reflection of RF signals.
The Encompass 4 Reader and/or antenna mounting location, aiming, and range con-
trol adjustment, and use of presence detectors can reduce interference from RF reflec-
tions. When these actions cannot adequately control reflections, other techniques such
as shielding, absorbing, range sensitivity adjustment, or barriers can also be used. See
Chapter 9, “Troubleshooting and Maintenance” for more information.

2-15
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Existing Interference
Interference from RF and electrical sources can degrade system performance and must
also be considered in the site design. Fluorescent lights, neon signs, nearby radio sta-
tions, or power lines can interfere with the optimal operation of the system. The mag-
netic impulse noise from relays that control gate opening and closing can also disrupt
the RF signal.
Interference may degrade both reader and tag performance. Existing interference at
the site may be shielded, removed, or positioned further from the Encompass 4 Reader
and/or antenna. In some cases, changing the operating frequency of the Encompass 4
Reader may provide a simple solution. Readers in proximity should have at least a 2
MHz frequency separation. See “Other Encompass 4 Readers in the Area” on page 2-
12. Strong RF sources of any frequency, in proximity to the tag, can preclude the tag
receiving the reader interrogation. See Chapter 9, “Troubleshooting and Mainte-
nance.”

Electrical and Communications Requirements

All construction work at the site must be completed before installing the Encompass 4
Reader. Electrical and communications cables should be installed according to all
applicable local and federal building code requirements. Specific instructions for posi-
tioning and installing the Encompass 4 Reader are discussed in Chapter 4, “Installing
the Encompass 4 Reader.”

Junction Box
Use a watertight junction box that meets applicable local and national building codes
for connecting power and communications wiring. The junction box houses the termi-
nal strip for power and communications connections. TransCore recommends a
NEMA Type-4 junction box with a back mounting panel.

Power and Communications Cables

Cable length for power and communications depends on the physical characteristics
of the Encompass 4 Reader installation site. Table 2-2 lists accessory kits available for
cabling options based on your site’s requirements.

Table 2-2 Connector Cabling Accessory Kits

Part Number Description

58-1620-001 5-ft connector cable harness

58-1620-002 20-ft connector cable harness

20-1620-003 Connector kit only

2-16
 Developing the Site Plan

Table 2-2 Connector Cabling Accessory Kits (continued)

Part Number Description

56-1620-004 13-pair cable (sold by the foot)

76-1620-005 110V AC to 18V AC Class C transformer

76-1620-006 12V AC to 18V AC step-up transformer

Electrical Power
A dedicated electrical power supply must be present at the site and available to the
Encompass 4 Reader at all times. The power must be 16-20V AC or 16-28V DC. A
step-down transformer is available (North America only) to convert a 120V AC
duplex wall outlet with ground to 18V AC, as is a step-up transformer to convert a
low-voltage 12V AC outlet to 18V AC. Consult your local and national electrical
codes for installation and safety requirements.
Note: Encompass 4 Readers installed outside North America require a locally sup-
plied transformer.

If 18V AC or 18V DC power is available, the transformer option is unnecessary.

TransCore offers a Class C transformer accessory kit (part number 76-1620-005) for
sites where 110V AC is available. It is the installer’s responsibility to supply conver-
sion equipment and wiring for other voltages. Table 2-3 contains power supply current
requirements.

Table 2-3 Power Supply Current Requirements

(RF On) (RF Off)

Worst Case Standby Operating
Supply
Maximum Current at Current at 68°F
68°F (20°C) (20°C)

16 to 20V AC 1.7 A at 18V AC 1 A at 18V AC

16 to 28V DC 1.7 A at 18V DC 1 A at 18V DC

Power circuits are protected internally against power surges.

Power Extension
Use Table 2-4 to determine the correct cable size according to the American Wire
Gauge (AWG) standard for the necessary length of extension cable. The numbers in
the first row of the table indicate cable size for the approximate cable length.
Note: If the cable is close to the maximum length, measure voltage at the Encompass
4 Reader with RF ON to ensure voltage does not drop below 16V. A drop in voltage
below 16V causes a reduction in read range and possible damage to internal electron-
ics as well as unreliable operation.

2-17
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table 2-4 Recommended Cable Length from Transformer to the Encompass 4 Reader

Cable Size (AWG)a 24 22 20 18 16 14 12

Maximum DCR (Ohms 0.0270 0.0175 0.0109 0.0069 0.0044 0.0027 0.0017
per foot at 68°F)b
Maximum length (feet) 29.63 45.71 73.39 115.61 183.91 293.04 467.84
Maximum length (feet)c 25 39 62 98 156 249 398
When used to extend 23 36 57 90 143 227 363
TransCore 5-ft cable
(feet)
When used to extend 14 22 35 55 88 140 224
TransCore 20-ft cable
(feet)

a. Use two conductors each for 18V and 18V return (4 conductors total on the TransCore cable
harness).
b. Direct current resistance (DCR) information is from the Belden catalog.
c. Calculated length is reduced by -15% to adjust for other variables such as connector contact
resistance. Length variable factor is 85%; maximum current drawn by the Encompass 4
Reader is 2.5 amps; maximum allowable voltage drop from the 18V AC transformer second-
ary is 2V.

Host Communications
Your site design must include communications between the Encompass 4 Reader and
a host computer. The Encompass 4 Reader communicates with the host computer
through an asynchronous serial line or through a Wiegand interface. This serial line
can be an
RS–232 interface or an RS–422 interface. The host computer must be able to accept
one of the interfaces shown in Table 2-5.

Table 2-5 Communications Interfaces and Conductor Requirements

Number of
Interface
Conductors

RS–232 3

RS–232 with RTS and CTS hardware and handshake 5

signals

RS–422 4

Wiegand 3

2-18
 Developing the Site Plan

RS–232 Interface
Use an RS–232 interface if one or more of the following conditions apply to your site:
• The host computer system is 50 ft (15.2 m) or less from the Encompass 4 Reader.

• The host computer system is more than 50 ft (15.2 m) from the Encompass 4
Reader and a pair of RF modems or limited distance modem/line drivers over
copper wire are used for communications between the Encompass 4 Reader and
the host. The distance from the RF modem to the Encompass 4 Reader should not
exceed 50 ft (15.2 m).
• Other common communications devices that can extend the RS–232 distance,
such as fiber optic modems, have been selected.
The standard RS–232 connection maximum distance depends on the baud rate, cable
type, and the RS–232 device at the other end.

RS–422 Interface
Use an RS–422 interface if one or more of the following conditions apply to your site:
• The host computer is more than 50 ft (15.2 m) from the Encompass 4 Reader.

• The host computer has an external limited-distance modem.

The standard RS–422 connection maximum distance depends on the baud rate, cable
type, and the RS–422 device at the other end.

Wiegand Interface
The Encompass 4 Reader can interface with equipment requiring the Wiegand
+5V DC data0-data1-ground interface. The reader uses the Wiegand interface
included with the RS–232 or RS–422 option.
Note: The Encompass 4 Reader comes from the factory with either RS–232 and Wie-
gand or RS–422 and Wiegand. If you want to use Wiegand, you must first connect the
Encompass 4 Reader using the RS–232 or RS–422 interface, set all necessary operat-
ing parameters in the reader, then set the Encompass 4 Reader’s configuration to Wie-
gand, and then connect the Encompass 4 Reader to the Wiegand interface.

Note: You must order tags programmed with Wiegand-formatted data when using a
Wiegand-compatible reader.

Input/Output Circuits
To connect the Encompass 4 Reader to external equipment such as a treadle or traffic
control light, install wires from these devices at the junction box. The Encompass 4
Reader input circuit is designed to connect to a dry contact closure. The Encompass 4
Reader output circuits are single-pole, double-throw relays providing dry contact clo-
sures. These contacts are rated at 42.2V AC peak (30Vrms) or 60V DC, at 1 A maxi-
mum with noninductive load.

2-19
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Output circuits are not intended for the direct control of electromechanical devices
such as motorized gates and barrier arms. For such applications, the Encompass 4
Reader output circuits should be used to drive a secondary, appropriately rated
high-power relay.

Antenna Interface
The site design must include an interface cable between the Encompass 4 Reader and
the compatible antenna chosen for the site. The antenna interface is RF coaxial cable
with male Type N sockets on each end.
Table 2-6 is a summary of coaxial cable performance. Figures indicate maximum
lengths of cable in feet.

Table 2-6 Reader to Antenna Cable Performance

915MHz
Overall
Cable Typea Diameter (in.)
Low Medium
Lossb Lossc

RG–223 0.216 6 18

RG–214 0.425 12 37

FHJ1–50 0.250 16 48

FSJ1–50 0.250 15 45

LDF2–50 0.375 28 85

FSJ4–50B 0.500 27 83

LDF4–50A 0.500 42 128

LDF5–50A 0.875 76 229

LDF6–50 1.125 103 310

LDF7–50A 1.625 122 366

a. Suffixes 50, 50A, and 50B indicate 50-ohm cables available from the
Andrew Corporation.
b. These cable lengths ensure optimal system performance (1 dB loss).
c. These cable lengths ensure adequate, but not optimal, system performance (3 dB
loss).

2-20
 3
Choosing, Installing, and Removing
Tags
 Chapter 3
Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags
This chapter describes the various tag types compatible with the
Encompass® 4 Reader and the procedures for installing and removing
compatible internal and external tags.

Compatible Tag Types

The Encompass 4 Reader provides the capability to read the various TransCore eGo®
Plus-type tags employing Super eGo (SeGo) protocol and eGo-style tags and other
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) ANS INCITS 256-2001-compliant tags
with Intellitag technology. Depending on options ordered, the Encompass 4 Reader
can read eGo Plus and eGo tags as well as TransCore IT2000 (in optional ATA/ISO
mode), ATA-protocol, ISO-compliant tags, and Inter-Agency (IAG) tags. It can also
read tags formatted to a wide range of industry-standard proprietary formats, includ-
ing SIA Wiegand 26-bit standard format.
See Appendix E for information about the numerous tag models.

Reader and Tag Model Interoperability

Table 3-1 lists the tags that are read by the Encompass 4 Reader. See
www.transcore.com/pdf/Tag-Reader-Matrix.pdf for most current information con-
cerning readers and supported tag protocols.

Table 3-1 Tags Read by the Encompass 4 Reader

Reader Beam Tags Battery Tags

Encompass 4 Reader eGo Plus Sticker Tag*; eGo Plus AT5105; AT5114; AT5140;
Security Sticker Tag*, eGo Plus AT5147; AT5510; AT5540;
License Plate Tag* AT5541; AT5542; AT5543;
AT5544; AT5545; AT5547;
eGo Windshield Sticker Tag; AT5704; AT5707; IT2221**;
eGo Tamper Resistant Tag; eGo IT2235**
License Plate Tag
other ANS INCITS 256-2001-
compliant tags with Intellitag
technology
AT5100; AT5102; AT5110;
AT5112; AT5125; AT5145;
AT5146; AT5715

* in SeGo, eGo, and/or ATA ** When used in optional ATA/ISO

modes mode

3-3
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

TransCore’s eGo Plus Tags

TransCore’s eGo Plus tags are offered to complete your Encompass 4 Reader System.
Table 3-2 lists some of the features of the TransCore eGo Plus tags.

Table 3-2 eGo Plus Tag Features

Number Number Number

Part Special Power of 6-bit of 128- of
Tag Used For
Number Features Source ASCII Bit Wiegand
Characters Frames Bits

Very thin, 20 1 N/A

13-07xx- flexible,
Sticker Tag
nnn# multi-layer
10 1/2 26 to 54
lamination
Toll,
Electronic Very thin, 20 1 N/A
vehicle flexible,
Security 13-07xy- registration multi-layer Beam
Sticker Tag zzz## (EVR), lamination,
Parking, tamper 10 1/2 26 to 54
Security detection
access
License Water- 20 1 N/A
13-0700- resistant,
Plate Tag 90x### exterior-
(LPT) 10 1/2 26 to 54
mounted
# the first "x" in the sticker tag listing defines which protocol is dominant (e.g., ATA or eGo/SeGo) in the tag;
the second "x" further defines other active protocol configurations; and "nnn" is a unique identifier that
differentiates between tags that are programmed similarly but that have different graphics or labels).
##the "x" in the security sticker tag listing defines which protocol is dominant (e.g., ATA or eGo/SeGo) in the
tag; the "y" further defines other active protocol configurations; and "zzz" is a unique identifier that
differentiates between tags that are programmed similarly but that have different graphics or labels)
### the"x" in the LPT listing determines whether the LPT is a standard eGo Plus LPT or a motorcycle
version.

eGo Plus Sticker Tag

The Encompass 4 Reader reads the eGo Plus Sticker Tag (Figure 3-1) configured to
support SeGo mode.

3-4
 Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

Figure 3-1 eGo Plus Windshield Sticker Tag

eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag

The Encompass 4 Reader reads the eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag (Figure 3-2) config-
ured to support SeGo mode.

Figure 3-2 eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag

eGo Plus License Plate Tag

The eGo Plus LPT (Figure 3-3) is a water-resistant tag used in applications requiring
an exterior-mounted tag.

3-5
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Figure 3-3 eGo Plus License Plate Tag

TransCore’s eGo Tags

TransCore’s various eGo tags are offered to complete your Encompass 4 Reader Sys-
tem. Table 3-3 lists some of the features of the TransCore eGo tags.

Table 3-3 eGo Tag Features

Number Number Number

Part Special Power of 6-bit of 128- of
Tag Used For
Number Features Source ASCII Bit Wiegand
Characters Frames Bits

Very thin, 20 1 NA
Toll,
Windshield 13-0510- flexible,
Electronic
Sticker Tag 004 multi-layer 10 1/2 26 to 54
vehicle lamination
registration Beam
(EVR),
Water- 20 1 NA
License 13-0510- Parking, resistant,
Plate Tag 900 Security exterior- 10 1/2 26 to 54
access
mounted

eGo Windshield Sticker Tag

The TransCore eGo WST (Figure 3-4) is offered to complete your Encompass 4
Reader System. It is a flexible sticker much like a vehicle registration sticker.

3-6
 Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

Figure 3-4 eGo Windshield Sticker Tag

eGo License Plate Tag

The eGo LPT (Figure 3-5) is a water-resistant tag used in applications requiring an
exterior-mounted tag.

Figure 3-5 eGo License Plate Tag

Installing eGo Plus Sticker Tags

eGo Plus Sticker Tags are designed to be attached by a semi-permanent adhesive to
the interior surface of nonmetallic windshields 0.190 to 0.230 inches (4.82 to 5.84
mm) in thickness. For optimum performance, you must install the tag at least 2 inches
(5 cm) from the metal in the windshield frame and 0.75 inch (1.9 cm) from the rear-
view mirror support post. Detailed instructions for installing the eGo® Plus Sticker
Tag are found in the pocket guide “Quick and Easy Installation Instructions for the
eGo® Plus Sticker Tag.”
Some vehicles have a tinted area across the top of the windshield. If the tint is conduc-
tive, it can interfere with reading the tag. If a windshield has this conductive tint, the
tag must be installed at least 2 inches (5 cm) below this tinted area.

3-7
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Some vehicle windshields contain a metallic treatment that could prevent an interior
windshield-mounted tag from being read. However, many of these metallized wind-
shields have areas that are not metallized. On a vehicle without open areas in its met-
allized windshield, you might need to install an Encompass 4 Reader-compatible LPT
on the vehicle. See the section “Installing eGo Plus License Plate Tags” on page 3-13.
Contact TransCore for more information. See the section “Technical Support” on page
9-6.

Required Materials
You need the following supplies to install an eGo Plus Sticker Tag:
• Glass cleaner, mild detergent and water, or any cleaning solution appropriate for
your windshield
• Clean, dry cloth
• eGo Plus Sticker Tag

Positioning eGo Plus Sticker Tags

TransCore designed the eGo Plus Sticker Tag to be installed on the upper center or
upper corner portion of the windshield. Figure 3-6, Figure 3-7, and Figure 3-8 illus-
trate possible upper center tag placement locations. If the upper portion of the
windshield is tinted with an aftermarket conductive tint, use placement shown in
Figure 3-7.

Mirror Post Attached on Windshield

Choose this placement option as shown in Figure 3-6 if the mirror post is attached on
the windshield.

Figure 3-6 eGo Plus Sticker Tag Placement

Mirror Post Attached on Header

Choose this placement option if the mirror post is attached on the header as shown in
Figure 3-7 or if the upper portion of the windshield is tinted with a conductive tint.

3-8
 Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

Figure 3-7 eGo Plus Sticker Tag Placement

Large Truck with No Inside Mirror

Choose this option for a large truck that uses exterior mirrors only (Figure 3-8).

Figure 3-8 eGo Plus Sticker Tag Placement in Large Truck

eGo Plus Sticker Tag Installation Procedures

Caution
Confirm that the outside temperature is above 50°F (10°C). The sticker tag may not
adhere correctly if the temperature is below this temperature.

To install the eGo Plus Sticker Tag

1. Determine the tag installation location for the vehicle using the placement
guidelines in the section “Positioning eGo Plus Sticker Tags” on page 3-8.
2. Thoroughly clean the interior surface of the windshield behind and around the
rearview mirror where the tag will be located.
3. Dry the tag location area thoroughly using a clean, dry cloth.
4. Remove the backing from the tag to expose the adhesive.

3-9
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Caution
Ensure that the tag is correctly located before touching it to the glass. Once the
sticker tag is applied to the glass, it cannot be moved without damage to the tag.

5. Holding the sticker tag by its edges (Figure 3-9), position the tag in the correct
area of the windshield (determined in Step 1), making sure the tag is oriented
horizontally and is at least two inches (5 cm) from the windshield frame and 0.75
inch (1.9 cm) from the mirror post.

Figure 3-9 Applying eGo Plus Sticker Tag to Windshield

6. Press the sticker tag firmly against the glass and gently rub over the entire tag
surface. Ensure that no air bubbles remain between the sticker tag and the
windshield (Figure 3-10).

Figure 3-10 Second Step of eGo Plus Sticker Tag Application

Removing eGo Plus Sticker Tags

Peel the eGo Plus Sticker Tags from the windshield and clean any reside using isopro-
pyl alcohol or commercial glass cleaner. The tag is inoperable once removed.

3-10
 Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

Installing eGo Plus Security Sticker Tags

An eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag is located in the same area on the windshield as the
eGo Plus Sticker Tags. See “Positioning eGo Plus Sticker Tags” on page 3-8 for this
information. The eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag is slightly less flexible than the eGo
Plus Sticker Tag so the installation instructions differ. Detailed instructions for install-
ing the eGo® Plus Security Sticker Tag are found in the pocket guide “Quick and Easy
Installation Instructions for the eGo® Plus Security Sticker Tag.”

eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag Installation Procedures

Caution
Confirm that the outside temperature is above 50°F (10°C). The security sticker tag
may not adhere correctly if the temperature is below this temperature.

To install the eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag

1. Determine the tag installation location for the vehicle using the placement
guidelines in the section “Positioning eGo Plus Sticker Tags” on page 3-8.
2. Thoroughly clean the interior surface of the windshield behind and around the
rearview mirror where the tag will be located.
3. Dry the tag location area thoroughly using a clean, dry cloth.
4. Remove the backing from the tag to expose the adhesive.

Caution
Ensure that the tag is correctly located before touching it to the glass. Once the
security sticker tag is applied to the glass, it cannot be moved without damage to the
tag.

5. Holding the sticker tag by its edges (Figure 3-11), position the tag in the correct
area of the windshield (determined in Step 1), making sure the tag is oriented
horizontally and is at least two inches (5 cm) from the windshield frame and 0.75
inch (1.9 cm) from the mirror post.

3-11
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Figure 3-11 Applying eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag to Windshield

6. Press the security sticker tag firmly against the glass. Gently rub over the entire
tag surface removing as much air from underneath the tag (Figure 3-12). The
security sticker tag’s rigid case may prevent you from forcing out all of the air
trapped between the tag and windshield. A minimal amount of air will not affect
tag performance.

Figure 3-12 Second Step of eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag Application

Removing eGo Plus Security Sticker Tags

Locate the tapered edge under the lower right corner of the eGo Plus Security Sticker
Tags and carefully pull the tag from the windshield. If you cannot lift the tag using
your fingers, insert a plastic scraper underneath the corner and lift the tag. Once you
have removed the tag from the windshield, clean any reside using isopropyl alcohol or
commercial glass cleaner. The tag is destroyed upon removal and cannot be reused.

3-12
 Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

Installing eGo Plus License Plate Tags

Metallized coatings on some vehicle windshields and windows absorb the RF energy
emitted by the Encompass 4 Reader, thus causing tags to be misread. You must use
exterior LPTs on vehicles with metallized coatings on their windshields and windows.
Use license plate installation techniques to install tags on the exterior of vehicles that
have this type of window coating.
Note: The read zone of an overhead Encompass 4 Reader should be adjusted accord-
ingly when an exterior tag is installed on a license plate, or the read zone will be
reduced.

Required Materials
• Screwdriver (flat-blade or Phillips depending on the vehicle’s license plate
mounting screws)
• Optional TransCore Exterior Tag Accessory Kit (19077-01). This kit contains
tamper-resistant mounting screws and wrench.
• eGo Plus LPT

Positioning eGo Plus License Plate Tags

The eGo Plus LPT is installed over the license plate at the upper part of the vehicle’s
front license plate area.
Note: If your state does not require a front license plate, install the LPT in the area
where the license plate would normally be mounted. If your vehicle does not have a
front license plate area, contact your tag agency for other tag options.

The orientation of the tag is important. The tag must be mounted so that the holes on
the tag base plate are on the top edge.

eGo Plus LPT Installation Procedures

To mount the eGo Plus LPT
1. Remove the screws from the license plate area of your front bumper (Figure 3-
13). If your vehicle does not have mounting screws you will need two self-
tapping threaded screws. You can also contact the tag agency to inquire about the
optional TransCore Exterior Tag Accessory Kit.
Note: You may need to use longer screws to fasten the LPT over the top area of your
license plate.

3-13
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Figure 3-13 Correct Mounting Location for LPT

2. Position the LPT so that it is within 18 inches (46 cm) of the center of the front
bumper as shown by the shaded area in Figure 3-13. If your vehicle’s license
plate mounting area is more than 18 inches (46 cm) from the center, you may
need to select an alternate location to mount the tag. Contact your tag agency if
your vehicle requires an alternate mounting location for the LPT.
3. Hold the LPT so that the etched lettering is facing you with the mounting holes to
the top as shown in Figure 3-14.

Figure 3-14 Correct Tag Orientation

4. Fasten the LPT to the bumper using the license plate mounting screws
(Figure 3-15). Install the LPT over the top area of the vehicle’s license plate if
your vehicle has a front license plate. If your state does not require a front license
plate, install the LPT in the area where a license plate would normally be
mounted.

3-14
 Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

Figure 3-15 Upper Placement Over the Top Area of the License Plate

Installing eGo Windshield Sticker Tags

eGo WSTs are designed to be attached by a semi-permanent adhesive to the interior
surface of nonmetallic windshields 0.190 to 0.230 inches (4.82 to 5.84 mm) in thick-
ness. For optimum performance, you must install the tag at least 2 inches (5 cm) from
the metal in the windshield frame and 0.75 inch (1.9 cm) from the rearview mirror
support post. Detailed instructions are found in the pocket guide "Quick and Easy
Installation Instructions for Windshield Sticker Tag."
Some vehicles have a tinted area across the top of the windshield. If the tint is conduc-
tive, it can interfere with reading the tag. If a windshield has this conductive tint, the
tag must be installed at least 2 inches (5 cm) below this tinted area.
Some vehicle windshields contain a metallic treatment that could prevent an interior
windshield-mounted tag from being read. However, many of these metallized wind-
shields have areas that are not metallized. On a vehicle without open areas in its met-
allized windshield, you might need to install an Encompass 4 Reader-compatible LPT
on the vehicle. See the section “Installing eGo Plus License Plate Tags” on page 3-13
and the section “Installing ATA License Plate Tags” on page 3-21. Contact TransCore
for more information. See the section “Technical Support” on page 9-6.

3-15
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Required Materials
You need the following supplies to install an eGo WSTs:
• Glass cleaner, mild detergent and water, or any cleaning solution appropriate for
your windshield
• Clean, dry cloth
• eGo WST

Positioning eGo Windshield Sticker Tags

TransCore designed the eGo WST to be installed on the upper center or upper corner
portion of the windshield. Figure 3-16, Figure 3-17, and Figure 3-18 illustrate possible
upper center tag placement locations. If the upper portion of the windshield is
tinted with an aftermarket conductive tint, use placement Option B as shown in
Figure 3-17.

Mirror Post Attached Low On Windshield

Choose placement Option A shown in Figure 3-16 if the mirror post is attached low on
the windshield.

Figure 3-16 eGo Windshield Sticker Tag Placement Option A

Mirror Post Attached High on Windshield

Choose placement Option B if the mirror post is attached high on the windshield as
shown in Figure 3-17 or if the upper portion of the windshield is tinted with a conduc-
tive tint.

3-16
 Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

Figure 3-17 eGo Windshield Sticker Tag Placement Option B

Mirror Post Attached to Headliner

Choose placement Option C if the mirror post is attached to the headliner as shown in
Figure 3-18. If the upper portion of the windshield is tinted with an aftermarket
conductive tint, place the tag two inches (5 cm) below the tinted area.

Figure 3-18 eGo Windshield Sticker Tag Placement Option C

Mounting the eGo Windshield Sticker Tag

Caution
Confirm that the outside temperature is above 50°F (10°C). The sticker tag may not
adhere correctly if the temperature is below this temperature.

To install the eGo WST

1. Determine the tag installation location for the vehicle using the placement
guidelines in the section “Positioning eGo Windshield Sticker Tags” on page 3-
16.
2. Thoroughly clean the interior surface of the windshield behind and around the
rearview mirror where the tag will be located.

3-17
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

3. Dry the tag location area thoroughly using a clean, dry cloth.
4. Remove the paper backing from the tag to expose the adhesive.

Caution
Ensure that the tag is correctly located before touching it to the glass. Once the
sticker tag is applied to the glass, it cannot be moved without damage to the tag.

5. Holding the sticker tag by its edges, position the tag in the correct area of the
windshield (determined in Step 1), making sure the tag is oriented horizontally
and is at least two inches (5 cm) from the windshield frame and 0.75 inch (1.9
cm) from the mirror post.
6. Press the sticker tag firmly against the glass and gently rub over the entire tag
surface. Ensure that no air bubbles remain between the sticker tag and the
windshield.

Removing eGo Windshield Sticker Tags

Removing eGo WSTs requires the use of a plastic scraper or equivalent tool. The tag
is inoperable once removed.

Installing eGo LPT

Follow the instructions presented in “eGo Plus License Plate Tag” on page 3-5 when
installing an eGo LPT.

Installing Interior ATA Tags

Interior ATA-protocol tags are installed using hook-and-loop material or double-sided
tape attached to the tag and to the windshield. When using hook-and-loop material,
the loop material should be applied to the back of the tag and the hook material should
be applied to the windshield. After the tag is installed, it can be removed easily and
used in any vehicle that has corresponding hook material affixed to the windshield.
Note: Installing interior tags using double-sided tape results in a semipermanent
attachment; the tag will be more difficult to remove than one installed using hook and
loop material.

Interior ATA-protocol tags may be ordered from the factory with hook-and-loop
material or double-sided tape already applied to the tag. The adhesive on this material
is specially formulated for temperature extremes inside vehicles.

Required Materials
You will need the following materials to install interior tags:
• Rubbing alcohol or 50/50 isopropyl alcohol and water

3-18
 Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

• Sponge and dry cloth

• Interior tags with two strips of factory-installed hook-and-loop material or fac-

tory-installed double-sided tape attached

Positioning ATA Tags

Interior ATA-protocol tags can be installed on the driver’s side, passenger’s side, or
upper center of the vehicle’s windshield, depending on the Encompass 4 Reader’s
position. See “Reader and Tag Alignment” on page 2-4.
Tags should be mounted consistently in all vehicles using a particular Encompass 4
Reader facility.

Interior Driver’s or Passenger’s Side

TransCore designed interior ATA-protocol tags for installation inside the vehicle, typ-
ically on the driver’s side of the windshield. Install the tag in the upper corner, at least
two inches (5 cm) from the metal window post, as shown in Figure 3-19.

Figure 3-19 Driver’s or Passenger’s Side (U.S.) Interior Windshield Tag Location

Interior Center Windshield

You may also install ATA tags on the upper center portion of the windshield. Position
the tag as closely as possible to the windshield’s upper center, behind the rearview
mirror. The top edge of the tag should be approximately one inch (2.5 cm) below the
base of the mirror, or above the base if enough room is available for the tag to be two
inches (five cm) from metal around the windshield, as shown in Figure 3-20.

3-19
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Figure 3-20 Upper Center Interior Windshield Tag Location

ATA Interior Tag Installation Procedures

Perform the following steps to install interior tags:
1. Clean the tag installation area on the interior surface of the windshield with
rubbing alcohol.
2. Dry the area thoroughly using a clean, dry cloth.
3. Remove the clear backing from the two strips of hook-and-loop material on the
back of the tag (Figure 3-21) or from the double-sided tape.

Figure 3-21 Hook-and-Loop Material on Interior Tag

3-20
 Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

4. Position the tag over the correct area of the windshield, making sure that the tag
and reader orientation are the same (horizontal or vertical).
5. Press the tag firmly against the glass.

Removing Interior ATA Tags

To remove an interior ATA-protocol tag installed using hook-and-loop material,
simply pull the tag away from the windshield.
To remove an interior ATA-protocol tag installed using double-sided tape, slowly pry
off the tag with a thin tool, such as a putty knife.

Installing ATA License Plate Tags

Metallized coatings on some vehicle windshields and windows absorb the RF energy
emitted by the Encompass 4 Reader, thus causing tags to be misread. Use exterior
LPTs on vehicles with metallized coatings on windshields and windows.
Use license plate installation techniques to install tags on the exterior of vehicles that
have this type of window coating.
Note: The read zone of an overhead Encompass 4 Reader should be adjusted accord-
ingly when an exterior tag is installed on a license plate, or the read zone will be
reduced.

Exterior tags may be installed on metal or plastic bumpers using the existing license
plate bracket and hardware.
The tag can be mounted on the front bumper where the license plate is normally
located or mounted directly to the front license plate or license plate bracket. Once
installed, the face of the tag should be pointing directly forward or slightly upward. If
the bumper, license plate, or license plate bracket has any material that overhangs the
tag, the tag will not function properly.

Required Materials
You need the following supplies to install license-plate mounted tags:
• Exterior LPT

• Two 0.25-inch (.63 cm) bolts and nuts (user-supplied). Length of the bolts can
vary depending on vehicle model.
• Screwdriver and wrench (user-supplied)

• 0.25-inch (.63 cm) spacers or washers (if needed). Thickness of spacers can vary
depending on vehicle model.

3-21
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Positioning ATA License Plate Tags

The orientation of the tag is important. The tag must be mounted so that the holes on
the tag base plate are on the bottom edge. See Figure 3-22.

Figure 3-22 Proper Tag Orientation

When positioning the tag, observe the following guidelines:
• The tag should be horizontal and parallel to the ground.

• The tag face should be perpendicular or tilted slightly upward.

• The tag may lean to the rear a maximum of 30 degrees.
• The tag may lean to the front a maximum of 10 degrees.

ATA License Plate Tag Installation Procedures

To mount the LPT
1. Position the tag so that the holes in the tag are on the bottom edge and the tag is
within 18 inches (.45 m) of the center of the front bumper as illustrated by the
shaded area in Figure 3-23.
Note: When mounting an exterior tag on heavy trucks or tractors, the tag must
be mounted within 1.5 inches (3.81 cm) of the top of the bumper.

3-22
 Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

Figure 3-23 Correct Exterior Tag Placement

2. Line up the holes in the tag as follows:
• If mounting the tag to a license plate or license plate bracket, line up the
holes in the tag to the upper holes of the license plate or license plate
bracket.
Note: Do not mount the tag to the bottom holes of the license plate or license
plate bracket. The reflective material on the license plate may interfere with the
proper functioning of the tag.
• If mounting the tag to the bumper, line up the holes in the tag with the holes
in the front bumper where the license plate would normally be located.
See Figure 3-23.
3. Insert bolts through the tag base plate holes and the holes in the bumper or the
holes in the upper portion of the license plate area. See Figure 3-24.

3-23
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Figure 3-24 Upper Placement In License Plate Area

4. Make sure the area within 45 degrees of the center of the tag is free of
obstructions. See Figure 3-25.

Figure 3-25 Obstruction-Free Area

5. Make sure that no material overhangs the tag. If overhang is more than ½ inch
(1.27 cm), insert spacers or washers directly behind the tag so that the tag is clear
of any overhanging obstruction. Secure the bolts with a nut. See Figure 3-26.

3-24
 Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

Figure 3-26 Spacer Positioned Behind Tag

6. Tighten the bolts and nuts with a screwdriver and wrench to secure the tag to the
vehicle.

Types of Bumpers
When mounting tags directly to a bumper, consider the following factors:
• Tags can be mounted on any metal or non-metallic surface; composition of
bumper does not matter.
• Tags can be mounted to plastic bumpers using self-threading screws.
• Metal bumpers should be pre-drilled; self-threading screws may be used.

Alternate Mounting Locations

If the exterior type tag cannot be mounted on the license plate bracket or directly on
the bumper, it may be mounted on a relatively vertical front surface of the vehicle. The
exterior tag should be mounted as close to the bumper as possible, following all guide-
lines regarding orientation, obstruction, and overhang given for bumper mounting. For
applications where the integrity of the mounting surface cannot be compromised, the
exterior tag can be mounted on a smooth flat surface using double-sided tape.

Required Materials
Exterior tags need to be installed on a relatively flat surface. You need the following
materials to install exterior tags:
• Rubbing alcohol, 50/50 isopropyl alcohol and water, or solvent/cleaner for metal

• Sponge and dry cloth

• Exterior tag with the double-sided adhesive tape attached

3-25
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Installation Procedures Using Tape

To install the tag on a metal or plastic bumper
1. Clean and degrease the tag installation area of the vehicle bumper with solvent/
cleaner.
2. Dry the area thoroughly using a clean, dry cloth.
3. Remove the backing from the double-sided tape on the back of the tag, as shown
in Figure 3-27.

Figure 3-27 Exterior Tag with Double-Sided Tape

4. Position the tag over the installation area, making sure that the tag and
Encompass 4 Reader are horizontally polarized.
5. Press the tag firmly against the bumper.

Installation Procedures Using Blind Rivets

To install an exterior tag using blind rivets through the tag’s installation
tabs
1. Position the tag on the bumper in the installation area and mark the hole positions
of the tag’s installation tabs on the bumper.
2. Follow the rivet manufacturer’s instructions to drill holes in the bumper for
rivets.
3. If the rivet head is smaller than the tag installation holes and can be pulled
through the holes, use a small washer to secure the rivet through the tag.

Removing Exterior Tags

To remove an exterior tag installed with rivets, follow the rivet manufacturer’s
instructions to remove the rivets.

3-26
 4
Installing the Encompass 4 Reader
 Chapter 4
Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

This chapter lists the materials needed and presents the procedures to
pre-test and install the Encompass® 4 Reader.

Installation Process
Note: In this section, unless specifically stated, "Encompass 4 Reader" applies both
to the Encompass 4 Reader with integrated antenna and Encompass 4 Reader with
external antenna.

After you have developed the site plan and identified the location to install the
Encompass 4 Reader and antenna1, if required, you are ready to install the equipment.
Installation involves the following tasks:
• Pre-installation testing of Encompass 4 Reader power and tag read capability

• Mounting the Encompass 4 Reader, and antenna if required, on a pole, ceiling, or

wall
• Connecting the antenna

• Connecting the Encompass 4 Reader power

• Marking the read zone

• Connecting the Encompass 4 host and sense input/sense output and communica-
tions

Materials Supplied by TransCore

You need the following materials to pre-test and install the Encompass 4 Reader.
TransCore supplies some of the materials; other materials must be obtained from other
sources.

Contents of Shipping Carton

Ensure that you have received all parts before beginning your pre-installation Encom-
pass 4 Reader tests. Your Encompass 4 Reader is packaged with the following materi-
als:

1. The Encompass 4 Reader is designed with an integrated patch antenna or with a RF cable
connector for use with an external antenna. Unless noted in the text, "antenna" refers to an
"external antenna."

4-3
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

• One Encompass 4 Reader

• One mounting bracket and the mounting hardware

• One Encompass 4 Reader Quick Start Guide

• Any accessories ordered as options as shown in Table 4-1
Required accessories are a power/communications cable harness and a 110V AC wall
transformer or a 12V AC to 18V AC step-up transformer. If you are using an antenna
with the Encompass 4, you also require an Encompass 4 Reader-compatible antenna
and an antenna RF interface. These may be ordered as accessories from TransCore or
obtained from other sources.

Installation Accessory Options

Table 4-1 lists optional TransCore Encompass 4 Reader installation accessory items.

Table 4-1 Installation Accessories

Part No. Description

54-1620-001 Wall or ceiling mount kit

58-1620-001 5-ft connector cable harness

58-1620-002 20-ft connector cable harness

20-1620-003 Connector kit only

56-1620-004 13-pair cable (sold by the foot)

76-1620-005 110V AC to 18V AC Class C transformer

76-1620-006 12V AC to 18V AC step-up transformer

16-4000-002 Encompass 4 Reader System Guide (this manual)

Note: The Encompass 4 Reader may be ordered with a multwire cable harness (part
number 58-1620-001 or 58-1620-002 in Table 4-1) as a separate accessory. One end
has a waterproof connector for the Encompass 4 Reader, and the other end has 13
pairs of color-coded wires.

Additional Materials Needed for Testing

You need these additional materials to perform the pre-tests on the Encompass 4
Reader:
• Test tags, supplied by the TransCore dealer or distributor

• Suitable 18V AC or 18V DC power wiring for the Encompass 4 Reader

• Audible circuit tester and 9V DC battery for circuit tester power

4-4
 Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

• Wire stripper

• One Encompass 4 Reader-compatible antenna (if required)

• Suitable RF interface coaxial cable (if using antenna)

Pre-installation Testing of the Encompass 4 Reader

Before installing the Encompass 4 Reader permanently at the site, you should use an
audible circuit tester to confirm that the Encompass 4 Reader has power and can read
a tag presented in the tag read zone.

Testing the Encompass 4 Reader Using an Audi-

ble Circuit Tester
An audible circuit tester is also called a buzz box. These boxes are available at some
electronic parts supply stores, or you can make a buzz box, as shown in Figure 4-1.
The buzz box is powered by a 9V DC battery and is equipped with two alligator-clip
leads. When you touch the leads together, the box makes an audible sound.

Figure 4-1 Wiring for Audible Circuit Tester

To test the Encompass 4 Reader that uses an integrated antenna, connect the power
supply as described in the appropriate section below, and then test as described in the
section “Bench Testing the Encompass 4 Reader Before Installation” on page 4-10.
To test the Encompass 4 Reader that uses an external antenna, connect the antenna and
power supply as described in the appropriate section below, and then test as described
in the section “Bench Testing the Encompass 4 Reader Before Installation” on page 4-
10.

4-5
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Connecting the Antenna

Use these instructions to connect the Encompass 4 Reader and antenna.

Caution
To avoid damage to the Encompass 4 Reader, you must connect the antenna before
applying power to the reader.

Figure 4-2 Back of Encompass 4 Reader Showing Antenna Connector

To connect the reader and antenna

1. Ensure the reader is turned off and unplugged.
2. Connect one end of the RF interface cable to the antenna.
3. Connect the other end of the RF interface cable to the antenna connector on the
back of the Encompass 4 Reader. See Figure 4-2.

Connecting the AC Power Supply

Caution
If you are using an external antenna, to avoid damage to the Encompass 4 Reader,
you must connect the antenna before applying power to the reader.

To connect the Encompass 4 Reader to a low-voltage AC power supply

1. Connect the Encompass 4 power wires from the cable to the transformer using
the color coding as described in Table 4-2.

Table 4-2 AC Transformer Connections for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connect to
Signal from Wire Pair from Transformer
Encompass 4 Encompass
Color Used Terminal Strip
4 Reader
Cable

Main power input Brown/Red and Orange and L1

Orange/Red Brown (16 to 20V AC)

Main power return Red and Red L2

(16 to 20V AC)

4-6
 Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

2. Complete the power connections at the power supply.

Connecting the DC Power Supply

To connect the Encompass 4 Reader to a low-voltage DC power supply

Caution
If you are using an external antenna, to avoid damage to the Encompass 4 Reader,
you must connect the antenna before applying power to the reader.

1. Connect the Encompass 4 Reader power wires from the cable to the low-voltage
terminals using the connection designations shown in Table 4-3.

Table 4-3 Low Voltage DC Cable Connections for the Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Signal from
Wire Pair from Connection Use
Encompass 4
Encompass 4 Color Used
Reader Cable

Main power input Brown/Red and Orange and 16 to 28V DC+ terminal
Orange/Red brown

Main power return Red and red 16 to 28V DC- terminal

Connecting Communications for Bench Testing

TransCore offers reader models that communicate through RS–232, RS–422, and
Wiegand interface protocols. This section describes the procedures and materials
required for connecting the communications to perform pre-installation bench testing
of the Encompass 4 Reader.

Required Materials
You need the following materials to connect the communications cable to the PC:
• PC or laptop
• Any terminal emulation program such as Procomm Plus™ or Hyper Terminal™
running on a PC
• Communications cable to connect to the COM1 port on your PC
Encompass 4 Reader communications and customer interface signals are supplied
from the Encompass 4 Reader to the host through a multiwire cable, which is a 13-pair
pigtail. The connector for this cable is located on the back of the Encompass 4 Reader.
Refer to the following sections to connect the appropriate communications wires from
the cable to the PC.

4-7
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

These sections contain instructions for connecting RS–232 and RS–422 communica-
tions between the Encompass 4 Reader and the PC for bench testing purposes. Each
section contains wiring instructions and pin assignments followed by step-by-step
connection procedures.
The Encompass 4 Reader can remain powered up while connecting reader-to-host PC
communications.

Connecting for Bench Testing with RS–232 Interface

RS–232 interface signals are supplied by three or five wires from the Encompass 4
communications cable. The pin assignments for the signal to the host male DB9 and
DB25 connectors are shown in boldface in Figure 4-3.

Figure 4-3 Pin Assignments for Signal to Host Connectors

Note: In Figure 4-3 supported pin assignments are in boldface.

4-8
 Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

Connecting the Encompass 4 Reader Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Table 4-4 shows the RS–232 colored wire assignments.

Table 4-4 RS–232 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connect Connect
Signal from
Wire Pair Wire to Wire to
Encompass Host DB9 Host DB25
4 Reader from Color Used
Encompass 4 Pin Pin
Reader

TxD — Red/Black Black Pin 2 Pin 3

Encompass 4
Reader sense
output, host sense
input

RxD — Red Pin 3 Pin 2

Encompass 4
Reader sense
input, host sense
output

Signal ground Yellow/Black Yellow or Pin 5 Pin 7

Black

Optional for hardware handshaking

RTS — Yellow/Red Yellow Pin 8 Pin 5

Encompass 4
Reader sense
output, host sense
input

CTS — Red Pin 7 Pin 4

Encompass 4
Reader sense
input, host sense
output

To connect the colored-wire cable using RS–232 interface

1. Connect the black wire (transmit data) from the red and black wire pair to pin 2
of the DB9 connector or pin 3 of the DB25 connector.
2. Connect the red wire (receive data) from the red and black wire pair to pin 3 of
the DB9 connector or pin 2 of the DB25 connector.
3. Connect either the yellow or black wire (signal ground) from the yellow and
black wire pair to pin 5 of the DB9 connector or pin 7 of the DB25 connector.
4. Plug the DB9 connector or DB25 connector into the PC.
If the host is set up for hardware handshaking, use the following procedures:

4-9
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

1. Connect the yellow wire (RTS) from the yellow and red wire pair to pin 8 of the
DB9 connector or pin 5 of the DB25 connector.
2. Connect the red wire (CTS) from the yellow and red wire pair to pin 7 of the DB9
connector or pin 4 of the DB25 connector.

Connecting for Bench Testing with RS–422 Interface

RS–422 interface signals are supplied by four wires from the Encompass 4 Reader
communications cable. Your host must have an RS–422 interface with either an inter-
nal or external converter.
Note: For temporary bench testing purposes only, you will need to connect the RS–
422 interface signal wires by following the pin-outs of your interface device. For per-
manent installations, follow the RS–422 connection instructions on page 4-25.

Bench Testing the Encompass 4 Reader Before

Installation
The Encompass 4 Reader is set to read the tag protocol(s) programmed into your
reader.
Note: Test tags should match the protocol(s) selected for your reader. These tags can
be ATA-protocol, ISO-compliant tags, or Inter-Agency Group tags affixed to a plastic
or wooden yardstick, or eGo Plus Sticker Tag or eGo Windshield Sticker Tags (WSTs)
affixed to a piece of nonmetallic windshield-type glass 0.190 to 0.230 in (4.82 to 5.84
mm) in thickness. The eGo and eGo Plus sticker tags have a reduced read range when
not attached to glass.
To test that the Encompass 4 Reader has power and can read a tag pre-
sented in the read zone
1. Confirm that the Encompass 4 Reader colored-wire pair cable is correctly
connected to a suitable AC or DC low-voltage power supply as discussed on page
4-6 and page 4-7 and that the transformer is connected to a power outlet.
If you are using an external antenna, confirm that the antenna is connected to the
Encompass 4 Reader.

Caution
To avoid damage to the Encompass 4 Reader, you must connect the antenna before
applying power to the reader.

2. Confirm that the Encompass 4 Reader colored-wire pair cable communications

are connected correctly as described in the section “Connecting Communications
for Bench Testing” on page 4-7.
3. Connect the two leads from the audible circuit tester to the white and red wire
pair (pair #8, lock/lock return) from the Encompass 4 Reader power/
communications cable.

4-10
 Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

4. Start the terminal emulation application Microsoft HyperTerminal by selecting

Programs>Accessories>Communications>HyperTerminal and press
ENTER.
5. In the HyperTerminal dialog boxes choose the com port to which the
communications interface is attached and set the properties as:
• Bits per second: 9600 baud
• Data bits: 8
• Parity: none
• Stop bits: 1
• Flow control: none
6. Cycle the power on the Encompass 4 Reader and ensure that the sign-on message
displays.
7. Input the following commands in the order provided in Table 4-5. Commands
include those to switch to command mode, set radio frequency (RF), turn on RF,
and return the reader to data mode.

Table 4-5 Commands for Bench Testing

Entry Reader Response Notes

#01 <CR> #Done <CR/LF> Switches Encompass 4

Reader to command
mode.

#647XXX #Done <CR/LF> Sets frequency

#6401 #Done <CR/LF> Turns on RF.

#00 <CR> #Done <CR/LF> Returns Encompass 4

Reader to data mode.

8. Pass the correct test tag for your reader application in front of the Encompass 4
Reader or antenna. The audible circuit tester should sound a tone when the tag is
read. If no tone sounds, ensure that steps 1, through 5 were performed correctly
and that you are using a compatible tag. Repeat steps 6 and 7. If no tone sounds,
contact TransCore (see “Technical Support” on page 9-6).
9. Disconnect the circuit tester from the Encompass 4 Reader power/
communications cable.
10. Disconnect the power and communications connections made for pre-installation
testing.
Note: You will need the audible circuit tester again to determine the read zone when
installing the Encompass 4 Reader at the site.

4-11
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Mounting the Encompass 4 Reader

This section lists procedures and materials required for mounting the Encompass 4
Reader on a round pole or on a ceiling, wall, or other flat surface based on the site’s
requirements.
In permanent installations using an antenna, the Encompass 4 Reader should be posi-
tioned as close as possible to the antenna. Long cable runs increase system sensitivity
to noise. See Table 2-6 on page 2-20 for maximum RF cable lengths.

Mounting the Encompass 4 Reader on a Round

Pole
The Encompass 4 Reader can be simply and inexpensively mounted on a round pole.
The pole must be a minimum of 2 inches (5 cm) in diameter and should extend
approximately 8 feet (2.4 m) above the pavement level. The pole must be installed
according to local building codes.

Required Materials To Be Supplied by Customer

You need the following materials to mount the Encompass 4 Reader on a round pole:
• A 5/32-inch Allen wrench to assemble and adjust the mounting brackets

• Two 0.5 inch (1.3 cm) wide, stainless steel hose clamp straps that are 12 inches
(30.5 cm) long for a typical 2-inch (5-cm) diameter pole or 24 inches (61 cm) long
for a 10-inch (25-cm) diameter pole
• Flat-tip screwdriver or adjustable wrench to tighten hose clamp straps

Procedures
To mount the Encompass 4 Reader to a pole
1. Unpack the Encompass 4 Reader. A factory-mounted bracket (Figure 4-4 and
Figure 4-5) is attached to the back of the Encompass 4 Reader. A pole mount
bracket assembly (Figure 4-6) is bubble-wrapped separately and contains a
plastic bag of four Allen screws and washers.
2. Using the two 0.5 inch (1.3 cm) stainless steel hose clamps, attach the pole mount
bracket assembly to the pole approximately 8 feet (2.4m) above the pavement
surface. Tighten slightly so you can adjust the Encompass 4 Reader left or right,
but not so slightly the straps slide down the pole.

4-12
 Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

Factory-mounted bracket

Figure 4-4 Back of the Encompass 4 Reader (reader shown has integrated
antenna)

Figure 4-5 Factory-Mounted Bracket

Figure 4-6 Pole-Mount Bracket Assembly

3. Using the four Allen screws and washers, attach the Encompass 4 Reader to the
pole mount bracket as shown in Figure 4-7. Tighten the screws slightly so

4-13
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

that the Encompass 4 Reader can be adjusted up or down, but not so slightly the
mounting assembly slips.

Figure 4-7 The Encompass 4 Reader Attached to the Pole Mount Bracket
4. Adjust the assembly by pointing the Encompass 4 Reader to the middle of the
area where tags will be read, and tighten all screws and straps slightly.
Note: Adjust the Encompass 4 Reader to provide the most direct line of sight to
the tags.
Figure 4-8 illustrates front and top views of a pole-mounted Encompass 4 Reader with
the approximate measurements for sites where tags would be mounted on the interior
driver-side windshield. eGo WSTs may be mounted on the interior upper center or
upper corner of the windshield, eGo Plus Sticker and Security Sticker tags may be
mounted on the interior upper center of the windshield.
Note: Determine the read zone before you tighten all screws and straps permanently.
Refer to the section “Marking the Read Zone” on page 4-29.

4-14
 Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

Figure 4-8 Front and Top Views of the Encompass 4 Reader Position
Note: The dimensions in Figure 4-8 are for demonstration purposes only and are
approximations for sites using the older ATA-type tags. Actual dimensions vary as
lane geometry and tag style varies from site to site. Adjust the Encompass 4 Reader
matching site and tag mounting positions to provide the most direct line of sight to the
tags.

Caution
Connect the reader bracket to earth ground using a ground cable and stake.
TransCore recommends that you follow the National Electric Code for lightning
protection for the locale where you are installing the Encompass 4 Reader.

4-15
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Mounting the Encompass 4 Reader to a Wall or

Flat Surface
The basic Encompass 4 Reader is supplied with a pole-mount bracket assembly (Fig-
ure 4-6) that allows you to adjust the Encompass 4 Reader up and down. TransCore
recommends using the wall-mount bracket accessory kit (Figure 4-9) in addition to the
pole-mount bracket to provide additional horizontal aiming flexibility when attaching
the Encompass 4 Reader to a pole with flat sides or to a wall or ceiling where other
structures can interfere with accurately aiming the Encompass 4 Reader toward the
tags.

Figure 4-9 Wall Mount Bracket Accessory (part number 54-1620-001)

Required Materials
You need the following materials to install the Encompass 4 Reader on a wall or flat
surface. Ensure the use of high-quality, corrosion-resistant anchor hardware.
• Anchor hardware suitable for the surface on which you mount the Encompass 4
Reader
Because the Encompass 4 Reader weighs only 9 1/2 lbs (4.3 kg), 0.25 in (0.6 cm)
bolt hardware is adequate to secure the unit to a wall or ceiling.
• Four hex nuts 3/8-16 threaded and four lockwashers

• 5/32-inch Allen wrench

• One Encompass 4 wall mount bracket accessory kit (required)

Procedures
To mount the Encompass 4 Reader to a wall or ceiling
1. Unpack the Encompass 4 Reader. Set aside the pole mount bracket.

4-16
 Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

Use the bracket in the remaining steps to provide greater adjustment for the
Encompass 4 Reader. The pole-mount bracket is wrapped separately from the
Encompass 4 Reader and contains a plastic bag of four Allen screws and washers.
2. Using the 5/32-inch Allen wrench, remove the factory-mounted bracket attached
to the back of the Encompass 4 Reader. Remove all four Allen screws and lock
washers from the bracket and set aside.
3. Unpack the wall-mount bracket accessory kit.
4. Using the Allen screws and lock washers set aside in Step 2, attach the wall-
mount bracket to the back of the Encompass 4 Reader, as shown in Figure 4-10.

Figure 4-10 Wall Mount Bracket Attached to the Encompass 4 Reader

5. Tighten the screws to secure the bracket.
6. Using the four screws and washers supplied with the wall-mount bracket, attach
the factory-mounted bracket to the wall mount bracket, lining up the four outside
screw holes as shown in Figure 4-11.

4-17
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Figure 4-11 Factory-Mounted Bracket Attached to Wall Mount Bracket

7. Tighten lightly, since you will want to adjust the bracket later. This subassembly
allows you to aim the Encompass 4 Reader left or right when all three brackets
are assembled.
8. Mount the pole-mount bracket to the wall, ceiling, or fixture using appropriate
anchors as shown in Figure 4-12.

Figure 4-12 Pole Mount Bracket Attached to Wall

4-18
 Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

9. Mount the Encompass 4 Reader to the pole-mount bracket using Allen screws, as
shown in Figure 4-13.

Figure 4-13 Connecting the Encompass 4 Assembly to Pole Mount Bracket

10. Adjust the assembly by pointing the Encompass 4 Reader to the middle of the
area where tags will be read and tighten all screws and straps slightly.
Note: Adjust the Encompass 4 Reader to provide the most direct line of sight to the
tags.

Caution
Connect the reader bracket to earth ground using a ground cable and stake.
TransCore recommends that you follow the National Electric Code for lightning
protection for the locale where you are installing the Encompass 4 Reader.

After mounting the Encompass 4 Reader, you must connect it to a dedicated 16 to 20V
AC or 16 to 28V DC power supply.

Caution
To avoid damage to the Encompass 4 Reader, you must connect the antenna before
applying power to the reader.

4-19
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Mounting the Antenna

If you are using the Encompass 4 Reader that requires an external antenna in perma-
nent installations, the antenna should be positioned as close as possible to the Encom-
pass 4 Reader. Long cable runs increase system sensitivity to noise. See Table 2-6 on
page 2-20 for maximum RF cable lengths.
This section provides guidelines for mounting antennas.
Note: Do not use an AA3152 Universal Toll Antenna for side-fire application.

Mounting the Antenna Curb-Side

Some site designs, for example those with curb-side antennas, require that the antenna
be mounted on a round pole. The pole must be a minimum of 2 inches (5 cm) in diam-
eter and should extend approximately 8 feet (2.4 m) above the pavement level. The
pole must be installed according to local building codes.

Procedures
Use the following guidelines to mount an antenna on a curb-side round pole.
To mount the antenna to a curb-side pole
1. Follow the manufacturer’s directions to attach the antenna assembly to the pole
approximately 8 feet (2.4 m) above the pavement surface.
2. Tighten slightly so that you can adjust the antenna left or right but not so slightly
that the antenna slides down the pole.
3. Adjust the assembly by pointing the antenna to the middle of the area where tags
will be read, and while in this position, tighten all screws and fastenings slightly.
Note: Adjust the antenna to provide the most direct line of sight to the tags.
Figure 4-14 illustrates front and top views of a pole-mounted antenna with the approx-
imate measurements for sites where tags would be mounted on the interior driver-side
windshield.
Note: Determine the read zone before you tighten all screws and straps permanently.
Refer to the section “Marking the Read Zone” on page 4-29.

After mounting the antenna, you must connect it to the Encompass 4 Reader. Follow
the procedures described previously in the section “Connecting the Antenna” on page
4-6.

Caution
To avoid damage to the Encompass 4 Reader, you must connect the antenna before
applying power to the reader.

4-20
 Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

Figure 4-14 Front and Top Views of the Curb-Side Antenna Position
Note: The dimensions in Figure 4-14 are for demonstration purposes only and are
approximations for sites using the older ATA-type tags. Actual dimensions vary as
lane geometry and tag style varies from site to site. Adjust the antenna to match site
and tag mounting positions to provide the most direct line of sight to the tags.

Mounting the Antenna Overhead

Some site designs require that the antenna be mounted in an overhead location.

Procedures
To mount the antenna in an overhead location
1. Follow the manufacturer’s directions to attach the antenna assembly to the
overhead location at approximately 18 feet above the pavement surface.

4-21
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

2. Tighten slightly so that you can adjust the antenna up and down but not so
slightly that there is a risk of the antenna falling.
3. Adjust the assembly by pointing the antenna to the middle of the area where tags
will be read, and while in this position, tighten all screws and fastenings slightly.
Note: Adjust the antenna to provide the most direct line of sight to the tags.
For example, in toll lanes the Universal Toll Antenna (UTA) would be installed
approximately 15 degrees from the vertical.
Figure 4-15 illustrates an overhead-mounted antenna with approximate measurements
for the read zone.

Figure 4-15 Encompass 4 Reader Installation with Overhead Antenna

Note: Determine the read zone before you tighten all screws and straps permanently.
Refer to the section “Marking the Read Zone” on page 4-29.

After mounting the antenna, you must connect it to the Encompass 4 Reader. Follow
the procedures described previously in the section “Connecting the Antenna” on page
4-6.

Connecting the Power Supply

To connect the Encompass 4 Reader to a low-voltage AC power supply follow the
procedures described previously in the section “Connecting the AC Power Supply” on
page 4-6.

4-22
 Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

To connect the Encompass 4 Reader to a low-voltage DC power supply follow the

procedures described previously in the section “Connecting the DC Power Supply” on
page 4-7.
After mounting the Encompass 4 Reader and antenna, if required, you must connect
the reader to a dedicated 16 to 20V AC or 16 to 28V DC power supply.

Caution
To avoid damage to the Encompass 4 Reader, you must connect the antenna before
applying power to the reader.

Connecting Communications
TransCore offers reader models that communicate through RS–232, RS–422, and
Wiegand interface protocols. This section describes the procedures and materials
required for connecting the communications to the junction box and to the sense input
and sense output circuits.

Required Materials
You need the following materials to connect the communications cable to the PC:
• PC or laptop

• Any terminal emulation program such as Procomm Plus™ or Hyper Terminal™

running on a PC
• Communications cable to connect to the COM1 port on your PC

Connecting the Encompass 4 Reader to the PC

Encompass 4 Reader communications and customer interface signals are supplied
from the Encompass 4 Reader to the host through a multiwire cable, which is a 13-pair
pigtail. The connector for this cable is located on the back of the Encompass 4 Reader.
Refer to the following sections to connect the appropriate communications wires from
the cable to the terminal strip that is located inside the junction box.
These sections contain instructions for connecting RS–232, RS–422, and Wiegand
communications between the Encompass 4 Reader and the PC. Each section contains
wiring instructions and pin assignments followed by step-by-step connection proce-
dures.
The Encompass 4 Reader can remain powered up while connecting reader-to-host PC
communications.

RS–232 Interface
RS–232 interface signals are supplied by three or five wires from the Encompass 4
Reader communications cable. The pin assignments for the signal to the host male
DB9 and DB25 connectors are shown in boldface in Figure 4-3.
4-23
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Connecting the Encompass 4 Reader Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Table 4-6 shows the RS–232 colored wire assignments.

Table 4-6 RS–232 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connect Connect
Signal from
Wire Pair Wire to Wire to
Encompass 4 Host DB9 Host DB25
Reader from Color Used
Encompass 4 Pin Pin
Reader

TxD — Red/Black Black Pin 2 Pin 3

Encompass 4
Reader sense
output, host sense
input

RxD — Red Pin 3 Pin 2

Encompass 4
Reader sense
input, host sense
output

Signal ground Yellow/Black Yellow or Pin 5 Pin 7

Black

Optional for hardware handshaking

RTS — Yellow/Red Yellow Pin 8 Pin 5

Encompass 4
Reader sense
output, host sense
input

CTS — Red Pin 7 Pin 4

Encompass 4
Reader sense
input, host sense
output

To connect the colored-wire cable using RS–232 interface

1. Connect the black wire (transmit data) from the red and black wire pair to pin 2
of the DB9 connector or pin 3 of the DB25 connector.
2. Connect the red wire (receive data) from the red and black wire pair to pin 3 of
the DB9 connector or pin 2 of the DB25 connector.
3. Connect either the yellow or black wire (signal ground) from the yellow and
black wire pair to pin 5 of the DB9 connector or pin 7 of the DB25 connector.
4. Plug the DB9 connector or DB25 connector into the PC.
If the host is set up for hardware handshaking, use the following procedures:
1. Connect the yellow wire (RTS) from the yellow and red wire pair to pin 8 of the
DB9 connector or pin 5 of the DB25 connector.

4-24
 Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

2. Connect the red wire (CTS) from the yellow and red wire pair to pin 7 of the DB9
connector or pin 4 of the DB25 connector.

RS–422 Interface
RS–422 interface signals are supplied by four wires from the Encompass 4 Reader
communications cable. Your host must have an RS–422 interface with either an inter-
nal or external converter.
Table 4-7 shows the RS–422 signals and their interface wires.

Table 4-7 RS–422 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connect to
Signal from Encompass 4 Wire Pair
Reader Signal from
from Host
Encompass 4 Color Used
Reader

RS–422 Transmit positive Yellow/Red Yellow Receive (+)

RS–422 Transmit negative Red Receive (–)

RS–422 Receive positive Red/Black Black Transmit (+)

RS–422 Receive negative Red Transmit (–)

Signal Ground Yellow/Black Yellow or Signal Ground

Black

To connect the colored-wire cable using RS–422 interface

1. Connect the yellow wire (transmit +) from the yellow and red wire pair to the
host receive (+) signal.
2. Connect the red wire (transmit –) from the yellow and red wire pair to the host
receive (–) signal.
3. Connect the black wire (receive +) from the red and black wire pair to the host
transmit (+) signal.
4. Connect the red wire (receive –) from the red and black wire pair to the host
transmit (–) signal.

Wiegand Interface
Wiegand interface signals are supplied by three wires from the Encompass 4 Reader
communications cable. The Encompass 4 Reader with RS–232 or RS–422 comes with
the Wiegand option built in. The Wiegand interface can only be used by the reader to
output valid Wiegand tag reads. All reader commands and responses are issued
through the serial interface.

4-25
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table 4-8 shows the Wiegand signals and the interface wires.

Table 4-8 Wiegand Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connect to
Signal from Encompass Wire Pair Signal from
4 Reader from Host
Color Used
Encompass
4 Reader

Wiegand Zero Output Blue/Red Blue Data0

Wiegand One Output Red Data1

Signal Ground Yellow/Black Yellow or black Ground

To connect Wiegand interface

1. Connect the blue wire (data0) from the blue and red wire pair to the data0 wire of
the Wiegand device.
2. Connect the red wire (data1) from the blue and red wire pair to the data1 wire of
the Wiegand device.
3. Connect either the yellow or black wire from the yellow and black pair to the
Wiegand device’s signal ground.
Note: The RS–232 or RS–422 interface is still included on the Encompass 4
Reader even when you use the Wiegand configuration. If serial communication is
not needed, TransCore recommends leaving the DB9 or DB25 connected to the
cable for future use.

Warning
Do not cut the RS–232 red/black wires. If you cut the wires, you may not be able to
use them in the future for testing, setting frequency, or adding additional functions.

Connecting Sense Input and Sense Output Circuits

The Encompass 4 Reader has two sense input circuits and three sense output circuits
available. The sense input circuits can be used to notify the Encompass 4 Reader of
external events and are designed to be connected to a free-of-voltage dry contact.
Sense output circuits are single-pole, double-throw relays that provide normally
closed and normally open dry contacts. The relay contacts are rated at 42.2V AC peak
(30 Vrms) or 60V DC at 1 A maximum. If controlling an external gate or device
requiring high current, an isolation transformer is required.
The following sections provide information to connect the sense input and sense out-
put circuits.

4-26
 Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

Sense Input Circuits

The Encompass 4 Reader supports two sense inputs – sense input0 and sense input1–
which requires two sense input lines for each loop sense or a total of four sense input
connections. Sense input0 is the presence detection device line and is used to control
RF power. As shown in Figure 4-16, sense input0 is through the red/green wire pair on
the I/O pigtail. The Encompass 4 Reader expects the sense input0 circuit to close
when a vehicle is present (i.e., a normally open condition). The minimum presence
true period is fixed at 0 ms, which indicates that no delay occurs in closing the circuit
when a vehicle is present.
Sense input1 allows the Encompass 4 Reader to monitor the status of a peripheral
device. The host computer can then check the status by polling the Encompass 4
Reader.

Figure 4-16 Sample Circuit Connections

Sense Output Circuits

The Encompass 4 Reader supports three sets of sense output signals. Two sets – sense
output0 and sense output1 – provide normally open or normally closed sense outputs.
The third sense output set is dedicated for testing and set up of the reader. It is defined
as the TAG_LOCK signal, which indicates a valid tag is in the read field.
These sense outputs are dry contacts that provide normally open and normally closed
sense outputs. The relay contacts are rated at 42.2V AC peak (30 Vrms) or 60V DC at
1 A maximum. If controlling an external gate or device requiring high current, an iso-
lation transformer is required.
As illustrated in Figure 4-16, sense output0, normally closed, is located on the orange/
black pair. Sense output0, normally open, is located on the brown/black pair.

4-27
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

In Wiegand mode operation, the sense outputs are not controlled by a predefined out-
put mode.
Table 4-9 lists the cable descriptions and functions for the interface signals. These
wire pairs can be used or terminated based on the specific project applications and site
requirements.
Using Table 4-9 as a guide to the functions of each of the wire signals, connect the
remaining wires to the appropriate terminal blocks on the terminal strip in the junction
box.

Table 4-9 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments

Pair Pin Color Signal Description Typical Function

Blue/Red E Blue WGND0 Wiegand data0 Parking/access

control
applications

F Red WGND1 Wiegand data1 Parking/access

control
applications

White/ L White Lock Tag lock output, Testing

Red active-closed maintenance

M Red Lock_RTN Tag lock return Testing

maintenance

Green/ N Green Sense Input0 Sense Input0 Loop and

Red (loop) presence
detection

P Red Sense Sense Input0 Loop and

Input0_RTN return; not presence
isolated from detection
signal ground

Blue/ R Blue Sense Input1 Sense Input1 General-purpose

Black sense input, not
used for detecting
presence

S Black Sense Sense Input1 General-purpose

Input1_RTN return; not sense input, not
isolated from used for detecting
signal ground presence

Brown/ T Black Sense Sense Output0 Switched output to

Black Output0_COM (tag detect), control gate
common terminal

U Brown Sense Sense Output0 Switched output to

Output0_NO normally open control gate
terminal

4-28
 Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

Table 4-9 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments (continued)

Pair Pin Color Signal Description Typical Function

Orange/ V Black Sense Sense Output0 Switched sense

Black Output0_COM (tag detect output for any
output), common external control
terminal (light, gate, buzzer,
etc.)

W Orange Sense Sense Output0 Switched sense

Output0_NC normally closed output for any
terminal external control
(light, gate, buzzer,
etc.)

Green/ X Black Sense Sense Output1, Switched sense

Black Output1_ COM common terminal output

Y Green Sense Sense Output1 Switched sense

Output1_NO normally open output
terminal

White/ Z Black Sense Sense Output1, Switched sense

Black Output1_ COM common terminal output

a White Sense Sense Output1 Switched sense

Output1_NC normally closed output
terminal

Yellow/ b Yellow GND Logic ground Signal ground

Black used with RS–232
and Wiegand

c Black GND Logic ground Signal ground

used with RS–232
and Wiegand

Caution
After connecting the wires in the communications cable, ground all drain wires
from the communications cable to the chassis ground in the NEMA enclosure.

Marking the Read Zone

The area where the Encompass 4 reads tags at the current RF range is called the read
zone. The antenna pattern, or read zone, of the Encompass 4 Reader would look
roughly like a pear-shaped balloon if you were able to see it. When installing the
Encompass 4 Reader, you should first mark the unit’s read zone using the RF range set
at the factory-default maximum. You can later adjust the read zone using the tech-
niques discussed in “Fine-Tuning and Verifying the Read Zone” on page 8-19.
If two Encompass 4 Readers are installed near each other, TransCore recommends that
you fine-tune each reader for the ideal read zone before connecting it permanently to

4-29
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

sense input/sense output and communications cables. A minimum of 2 MHz fre-

quency separation between the two adjacent readers is required for correct operation.

Required Materials
You need the following materials to mark the read zone:
• Test tags, supplied by the TransCore dealer or distributor

• Piece of windshield-type glass 0.190 to 0.230 inches (4.82 to 5.84 mm) in thick-
ness and approximately 12 inches (30.48 cm) square on which to attach the eGo
Plus Sticker Tag, eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag, or eGo WST

Caution
Both the eGo Plus Sticker Tag and eGo WST have a reduced read range when not
attached to glass.
• Audible circuit tester and 9V DC battery for circuit tester power as described in
the section “Bench Testing the Encompass 4 Reader Before Installation” on page
4-10.
• Piece of chalk or roll of tape

• Plastic or wooden yardstick for ATA or IAG tags

• Vinyl electrical tape or hook-and-loop material

Procedures
Note: Using test tags that are not mounted to vehicles give a general idea of the read
pattern but the pattern will vary somewhat when actual vehicles with tags are tested.
Final adjustments must be made with tags properly mounted on a variety of vehicles.

To mark the read zone

1. Confirm the following:
• You have correctly connected the power supply as described “Connecting
the AC Power Supply” on page 4-6 and “Connecting the DC Power Supply”
on page 4-7.
• You have correctly connected communications as described in “Connecting
Communications” on page 4-23.
• You have correctly connected sense input and sense output circuits as
described in “Connecting Sense Input and Sense Output Circuits” on page 4-
26.
2. Connect the red and white leads from the audible tester to the red and white pair
of wires from the Encompass 4 Reader power/communications cable.
3. Start the terminal emulation application Microsoft HyperTerminal by selecting
Programs>Accessories>Communications>HyperTerminal and press
ENTER.

4-30
 Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

4. In the HyperTerminal dialog boxes choose the com port to which the
communications interface is attached and set the properties as:
• Bits per second: 9600 baud
• Data bits: 8
• Parity: none
• Stop bits: 1
• Flow control: none
5. Cycle the power on the Encompass 4 Reader and ensure that the sign-on message
displays.
6. Input the following commands in the order provided in Table 4-5 on page 4-11.
Commands include those to switch to command mode, set operational mode, turn
on RF, and return the reader to data mode.
7. Secure the ATA or IAG test tag to the end of the yardstick using electrical tape or
hook-and-loop material or affix the test eGo Plus or eGo WST to the glass. Be
sure the tag polarization (horizontal or vertical alignment) matches that of the
Encompass 4 Reader or antenna used. If using an eGo Plus-type test tag or eGo
WST, the glass should be in front of the tag (between the tag and the reader or
antenna).
8. Stand directly in front of and about 5 feet (1.5 m) away (see Figure 4-17) from
the Encompass 4 Reader or antenna. Hold the stick or the piece of glass so that
the tag is positioned at a height and angle consistent with a tag installed on a
vehicle. The test tag should cause the audible tester to sound.
Note: If you hold the test tag in your hand, your hand absorbs the RF signal and
the test results are not accurate.
9. Mark the spot with chalk or tape.
10. Move to the left until the sound stops and mark the ground with chalk or tape at
the location of the tag when the sound stopped.
11. Return to the center and then move to the right until the sound stops and mark the
ground with chalk or tape at the location of the tag when the sound stopped.
12. Return to the center and step backward 2 feet (0.6m) and repeat steps 5 through 7.
13. Continue moving the tag in this manner, placing marks on the ground to identify
the boundary of the read zone each time the sound stops. Continue moving the
tag to various locations until the read zone is fully marked.
14. You can now connect the outer marks to draw the outer boundary of the read
zone.
Figure 4-17 is a view of a sample read zone within a controlled lane. The outer X
marks show the outside edges of the read zone.

4-31
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Figure 4-17 Sample Read Zone Marking Pattern

15. Standing at the farthest point of the pattern, walk toward the Encompass 4 Reader
or antenna and listen for a continuous sound from the audible tester. If the sound
is not continuous, it could indicate a weak or “patchy” RF pattern. See “Fine-
Tuning and Verifying the Read Zone” on page 8-19 to adjust the read zone.

4-32
 5
General Software Information
 Chapter 5
General Software Information

This chapter provides software-related information for the Encompass® 4

Reader System.

This chapter presents various software-related topics arranged in alphabetical order by

subject. In addition to this chapter, see Chapter 6, “Communications Protocols,” and
Chapter 7, “Commands,” for more information.

Command Entry Conventions

All Encompass 4 Reader commands are preceded by the start-of-message character
(#). The end-of-message sequence expected from the host is a carriage return (CR).
The Encompass 4 Reader terminates messages with a return and a line-feed (CR/LF).
For example, the command #01 Switch To Command Mode is typed as follows:
#01<ENTER>
where <ENTER> is the Enter or Return key.
Some command characters may be represented by the letter N. This letter indicates
you are to supply a value. Maximum valid entries are the numbers 0 through 9 and the
uppercase letters A through F. These letters allow for as many as 16 available user
responses and are based on the hexadecimal numbering system.
Commands have at least two characters following the # character. Table 5-1 shows the
basic structure of a four-character command.

Table 5-1 Four-Character Command Structure

#1005 Set Baud Rate To 9600 Baud

# All commands are preceded by the # character.

1 Indicates the command group. This command is in Group 1-

Communications Port Control.

0 Indicates the command subgroup. In this example, all commands with

a second digit of 0 apply to the main port.

0 The command digit. In this example, the 0 indicates that this command
affects the baud rate.

5 Indicates the setting. Normally this is a variable and is usually a

hexadecimal value from 0 through F. In this example, 5 sets the baud
rate to 9600, the factory setting. In some commands, this digit may be
a four-place hexadecimal string or a character string.

5-3
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Command Response Conventions

Like the Encompass 4 Reader commands, responses are preceded by the # character.
Many Encompass 4 Reader commands respond with #Done or #Error indicating
the command was or was not recognized and completed. Other commands respond
with a four-character identifier followed by one or more values.
Table 5-2 shows an example of a command/reply sequence. This example assumes
that an Encompass 4 Reader with serial number SN97001P running version X.XX
software is connected to a PC running a terminal emulation software package such as
Windows Hyper Terminal or Procomm Plus. The command sequence verifies that
communications are working correctly.

Table 5-2 Sample Command Sequence

Entry Encompass 4 Reader Response Notes

#01 <CR> #Done <CR/LF> Switches Encompass 4

Reader to command mode.
#505 <CR> #Model E4 Series Ver X.XX Reports the software
SN08001P <CR/LF> version and serial number.

#00 <CR> #Done <CR/LF> Returns Encompass 4

Reader to data mode.

In command discussions, Encompass 4 Reader response characters may be shown in

brackets < >. The use of brackets indicates that the response is a value in the range of
characters. The brackets are not part of the response. For example, the response to
command #520 Display Power Fail Bit is either a 0 or a 1. In the command discus-
sion, the response is shown as:
#PWRB <0-1>
with actual Encompass 4 Reader response being one of the following:
#PWRB 0
#PWRB 1
In this example, PWRB is the four-character identifier for power fail bit, and the 0 or 1
is the value. All spaces shown in the response are actual spaces sent from the Encom-
pass 4 Reader. In this example, one space is between the letter B and the number.

Operating Parameters
The Encompass 4 Readers maintain their operating parameters in non-volatile mem-
ory (NVRAM) so that the parameters are preserved after a power-down sequence.

5-4
 General Software Information

Power Fail
The system maintains a power fail flag. The host transmits command #520 Display
Power Fail Bit to determine if a power down has occurred. This flag is cleared by both
command #63 Reset Reader and command #65 Reset Power Fail Bit.

Program Download
Program download stores the Encompass 4 applications software into the reader’s
flash memory. Program download is used to install program upgrades, add features,
and to recover from corrupted program data.
Note: Program download is a hosted process. Exercise caution so that you don’t inad-
vertently enter download mode.

Download Considerations
You should consider the following factors when performing program download:
• The Encompass 4 Reader does not process tags while in download mode.

• The Encompass 4 Reader does not accept any program data unless a successful
erase of flash memory has been performed before transmitting the data. Erasing
the flash memory typically takes two seconds.
• Exiting from download mode re-executes startup. If the new software has been
loaded without errors, the Encompass 4 Reader comes up in data mode. If a flash
checksum error is detected, the Encompass 4 Reader reenters download mode and
transmits a sign-on message with a boot version of 0.00x and without a serial
number.
Note: The Encompass 4 Reader uses default communications parameters when oper-
ating in download mode – 38400 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, basic protocol
– and does not echo commands.

Download Procedures
If TransCore releases a new version of the Encompass 4 Reader software or if the
Encompass 4 Reader seems not to be working properly, you may need to download
the software to the Encompass 4 Reader. Contact technical support or your TransCore
Encompass 4 Reader sales representative.

Startup
Upon startup, Encompass 4 Reader’s transmit a sign-on message or a boot ROM fail-
ure message.

5-5
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Sign-On Message
If startup is successful, the sign-on message appears as follows:
Model E4 Series [software version] SNYYYYYY
[Copyright notice]
where YYYYYY is the serial number assigned to the 4800 Reader unit being used.
Serial number 000000 is the default setting and is not a valid number. If this number
appears in the sign-on message, the serial number has never been stored into reader
memory. The serial number must be assigned by factory-authorized personnel using
command #695S...S Set Serial Number. Because only six digits are allowed in
the software, when setting the serial number skip the fourth (middle) digit of the
seven-digit number shown on the reader label.
If the flash memory checksum does not indicate verification, the sign-on message
appears as follows:
Model [E4] Ver 0.00x
[Copyright notice]

Boot Failure Message

The software performs a checksum function on itself. The function returns a specific
value for the particular version of software. If the value returned is not correct, the
boot ROM checksum assumes that locations have been corrupted and a failure condi-
tion exists. If the boot ROM checksum is not correct, a boot failure message is trans-
mitted. If the failure message does not transmit, a communications error has occurred
or the boot failed to the extent that it cannot transmit the failure message.
If the failure message version number equals 0.00 and no serial number exists, the
flash memory checksum has failed, and the Encompass 4 Reader is operating out of
boot ROM. In this case, the Encompass 4 Reader automatically enters download mode
and waits for a new program to be loaded into the flash memory. Follow the instruc-
tions in “Program Download” on page 5-5 to download a new program.

Tag/Message Buffer
In basic communication protocol, the Encompass 4 Reader does not provide tag mem-
ory storage beyond the quantity required for uniqueness checking. This feature allows
adequate buffering of tag data under normal operating conditions. The Encompass 4
Reader cannot operate as a stand-alone component. When the buffer fills, subsequent
tag IDs will be lost.
In error correcting protocol (ECP), a buffer of up to three additional tag reads will be
held in case a host system is unable to acknowledge tag reads in real time.

5-6
 6
Communications Protocols
 Chapter 6
Communications Protocols
This chapter describes the communications protocols for the
Encompass® 4 Reader.

Introduction
The Encompass 4 Reader supports the following communications protocols:
• Basic
• Error correcting protocol (ECP)
The following protocol information provides reference information relevant to devel-
oping host software.
Communications are performed using the 7-bit ASCII code with optional parity, thus
providing easy setup, testing, and diagnostics with standard ASCII terminals and
serial printers. Parity must be enabled to achieve the specified undetected error rate.
Each message is framed within the start-of-message (som) and end-of-message (eom)
characters so that the host computer can detect the beginning and end of each mes-
sage. This convention is most important under marginal communications conditions
during which the host may receive extraneous noise-induced characters between
reader transmissions. In such instances, the host is capable of ignoring any messages
that do not conform to the som...eom frame sequence.
Both data mode and command mode require a two-way message interchange is when
using ECP. This interchange is completed by the message recipient returning a mes-
sage acknowledgement to the message sender.
With ECP, all transmissions require a message. If a message is not received, the sender
will time out with the same effect as if it had received a negative acknowledgment
(from the host) or an Error message from the Encompass 4 Reader.
Software (XON/XOFF) flow control is optionally supported. Be careful in the use of
XON/XOFF since noise-induced characters may be interpreted by the Encompass 4
Reader as the XOFF character, which would suspend reader output without informa-
tion reaching the host computer. For more information see “Software Flow Control”
on page 8-19.
Note: TransCore recommends that XON/XOFF flow control be disabled while using
ECP.

6-3
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Basic Protocol
With basic protocol, messages sent to and from the Encompass 4 Reader and the host
are transmitted without error checking. For each host transmission, the Encompass 4
Reader returns a Done or Error message to the host.
When the host computer is physically close to the Encompass 4 Reader and no sources
of interference exist, the basic protocol provides reliable communications.
The host must be ready to receive reader-transmitted messages because in basic proto-
col the Encompass 4 Reader does not wait for the host to acknowledge a message
before transmitting the next message. If necessary, the host may halt reader transmis-
sions by using software or hardware flow control. Refer to Chapter 8 for flow control
information.

Error Correcting Protocol

When the quality of data communications is imperative or may be suspect, you can
invoke ECP to ensure the integrity of data transmitted between the Encompass 4
Reader and the host.
Note: TransCore recommends that basic protocol (not ECP) be used when commands
are entered manually at the keyboard.

Wiegand output is automatically disabled when the reader is put into ECP mode.
Error correction is accomplished with the use of a cyclic redundancy check (CRC)
value that is based on the message data. The originator (reader or host) calculates the
CRC value of a message and includes it in the transmitted message.
The recipient (reader or host) also calculates a CRC value for the received message. If
the transmitted message data is correct, the CRC value calculated by the recipient will
agree with the CRC value calculated by the originator. If the CRC values do not agree,
the recipient rejects the message.
Message sequence numbers are also included when using ECP. These sequence num-
bers are checked to determine if the message received has the correct sequence num-
ber; if not, the recipient rejects the message.
Since the seven-bit ASCII code is used and there are eight data bits per character, the
eighth bit can optionally be used to support parity. Where parity is selected, the CRC
value calculation includes the parity of each character in the calculation of the CRC
value.
Parity is required to achieve the most reliable communications. If parity is enabled,
both the Encompass 4 Reader and the host must issue a message if any received char-
acter has a parity error. However, the message must not be transmitted before receipt
of the eom character. In this case, the Encompass 4 Reader will issue an Error mes-
sage, and the host computer will issue a negative acknowledgment message.

6-4
 Communications Protocols

Basic Protocol and ECP Format

Note: In the following text, the symbols < and > are used to represent required vari-
able message data, and the symbols [and] are used to represent optional data. These
symbols are not part of the message syntax.

Reader Transmissions
The basic protocol format and the data inquiry protocol format are as follows:
<som><data><eom>
The ECP format is as follows:
<som><seq><data><crc><eom>
where

<som> Start-of-message (ASCII # character)

<seq> Sequence number (ASCII hex) that represents an even number in

the range 0–9, A–F (0, 2, 4, 6, 8, A, C, E). The Encompass 4
Reader maintains the number. The host must acknowledge reader
transmissions by sending an ACK message with the same
sequence number received from the Encompass 4 Reader. The
Encompass 4 Reader updates its sequence number upon receipt of
a valid host ACK. If an ACK is not received, the Encompass 4
Reader retransmits the message. A reader transmission sequence
is not considered complete until the Encompass 4 Reader receives
an ACK and updates its sequence number.

<data> An ASCII string up to 72 characters long. This string may contain

tag data, a presence without tag report; an input status change
report; an Error06, Error07, Error08, or Error11
message; or a sign-on message. Auxiliary data may also be
included.

<crc> Field containing four ASCII digits that represent the 16-bit CRC
value calculated on the message. The CRC value is calculated on
bytes between the som character and the first <crc> byte.

When the host receives a properly framed message, it can

calculate a 16-bit CRC value. The calculation is applied to the
character string that immediately follows the <som> and that
ends with the character immediately preceding the first <crc>
character.

The transmitted CRC value can then be compared with the binary
equivalent of the received <crc> characters. If the transmitted

6-5
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

and received CRC values do not match, the recipient assumes the
message was received in error, and transmits a NAK message
response.

<eom> End-of-message characters (ASCII CR and LF). The system

includes both a carriage return (CR) and line feed (LF) to
facilitate the use of terminals and printers.

If the host receives a <som> character in the middle of a data

message, the message in progress is aborted. The assumption is
that an <eom> was lost and the Encompass 4 Reader is in the
process of retransmitting the previous message.

ECP Host ACK/NAK Response

With ECP, the host computer responds to all data message transmissions from the
Encompass 4 Reader using the following acknowledgment or negative acknowledg-
ment response format.
<som><seq><ack/nak><crc><eom>
where

<som> Start-of-message (ASCII # character)

<seq> An echo of the sequence number received from the Encompass 4

Reader. The sequence number should correspond to the data
message that is being positively or negatively acknowledged by
the host. If the Encompass 4 Reader receives an ACK message
with the incorrect sequence number, the data message is
retransmitted.

The host computer resets the anticipated data message sequence

number to that of the Encompass 4 Reader before
communications can resume without error.

<ack/nak> ASCII @ character for ACK response; ASCII ? character for NAK
response

<crc> CRC value for the message

<eom> End-of-message character (ASCII CR)

The Encompass 4 Reader sets a user-programmable timeout delay at the time each
message is transmitted based on command #612NN Set Error Correcting Protocol
Timeout, where NN = timeout delay. To disable the timeout delay for diagnostic pur-
poses, issue the command #612FF Disable Error Correcting Protocol Timeout.
If the timeout delay expires before the Encompass 4 Reader receives an ACK or NAK
message from the host, a logical NAK condition will be declared. If the Encompass 4
Reader receives a NAK or timeout, the reader retransmits the data message.

6-6
 Communications Protocols

When the Encompass 4 Reader receives an ACK message, the system software treats
the message as having been properly received by the host. The software increments
the sequence number, and advances pointers to the next message in the Encompass 4
Reader’s message queue to prepare for sending the next message.

Switch to Command Mode Request

The host computer may issue command #01 Switch to Command Mode while in data
mode.
The basic protocol format is as follows:
<som><cmd><eom>
The ECP format is as follows:
<som><seq><cmd><crc><eom>
where

<som> Start-of-message (ASCII # character)

<seq> Sequence number generated by the host computer separately

from that appearing in data messages transmitted by the
Encompass 4 Reader

<cmd> Switch to command mode (ASCII characters 01)

<crc> CRC value for the message

<eom> End-of-message character (ASCII CR)

Host Transmission
The host computer initiates synchronous communications between the Encompass 4
Reader and the host. The host begins a sequence by issuing a command; the Encom-
pass 4 Reader responds accordingly.

6-7
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

The basic protocol format is as follows:

<som><cmd>[<data>]<eom>
The ECP format is as follows:
<som><seq><cmd>[<data>]<crc><eom>
where

<som> Start-of-message (ASCII # character)

<seq> Sequence number (ASCII hex digit) that represents an odd

number in the range 0–9, A–F (1, 3, 5, 7, 9, B, D, F). The host
should use odd sequence numbers in its command since the
Encompass 4 Reader uses even sequence numbers in its
transmissions. This method eliminates the possibility of a
synchronous host command and an asynchronous reader
transmission having the same sequence number.

Upon receiving a host command, the Encompass 4 Reader echoes

the command’s sequence number in its response. Therefore, the
host computer updates its sequence number upon receipt of a
valid reader message. If the sequence number is not updated
before transmission of the next command, the Encompass 4
Reader will not service the new command; it will retransmit its
previous message. A command/message sequence is not
complete until the host updates its sequence number.

<cmd> Command code, a string that contains from two to four ASCII
hex characters

[<data>] Optional data field, an ASCII string of as many as 20 characters

in length. For example, the store hardware configuration string
command is #696S...S or command #696 Store Hardware
Configuration String followed by the data string S...S.

<crc> CRC value for the message

<eom> End-of-message character (ASCII CR)

Reader Command Response

The basic protocol format is
<som><resp><eom>
The ECP format is
<som><seq><resp><crc><eom>

6-8
 Communications Protocols

where

<som> Start-of-message (ASCII # character)

<seq> Echo of sequence number received in host command message

<resp> Response string. The Encompass 4 Reader returns Done,

Error, or another ASCII string depending on the host
transmission. This string can be up to 72 characters long.

<crc> CRC value for the message

<eom> End-of-message character (ASCII CR and LF)

Sample Messages
This section contains examples of typical messages transmitted between the Encom-
pass 4 Reader and the host computer.

Reader Transmissions
Basic protocol reader transmission
#KING 1302<eom>
Host response
No host response for non-ECP
ECP reader transmission
#4KING 1302 <crc><eom>
where

# Start-of-message character

4 Message sequence number

KING 1302 Message data: Tag ID is shown.

Other sample message data could be as follows:
IOST C0 O2 I0 D24 (display I/O status)
Error06 (frequency not set)

<crc> CRC value for the message

<eom> End-of-message character

Host response
#4@<crc><eom>

6-9
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

where

# Start-of-message character

4 Message sequence number

@ ACK (acknowledgment character)

(? returned for a negative acknowledgment)

<crc> CRC value for the message

<eom> End-of-message character

Host Command Transmissions

Basic protocol host transmission
#647XXX<eom>
Reader response
#Done<eom> or #Error<eom>
#Error<eom> is returned if the host transmission is not a legal command with legal
data.

ECP host transmission

#7647XXX<crc><eom>
where

# Start-of-message character

7 Message sequence number

647XXX Select RF Operating Frequency command where

647XXX is the command and XXX is a hexadecimal value from
000 to 118. In this example, XXX sets the RF frequency to 903
MHz.

<crc> CRC value for the message

<eom> End-of-message character

Done Command has been invoked by the Encompass 4 Reader

Reader response
#7Done<crc><eom> or #7Error<eom>
For some commands, the Encompass 4 Reader responds with data that relates to the
command, such as T0F 0, to indicate Wiegand mode enabled for a #532 Display Wie-
gand Mode Status command.

6-10
 Communications Protocols

#7Error<eom> will be returned if host transmission is not a legal command with

legal data.

Timing and Synchronization

The ECP is largely independent of baud rate. The timeout delays previously described
are a function of baud rate.
The Encompass 4 Reader supports an ECP timeout, which applies equally to both
transmit and receive.
The receiver’s minimum timeout delay equals the time to transmit/receive the longest
anticipated message at the current baud rate setting. Additional margin should be
included for idle periods between characters; for example, processing overhead, if
any. The timeout delay period can be expressed as follows:
Τrec (ms) = L x [Τchar + Τidle]
where

Τchar (ms) 1000 x [ Bc / Rb ]

Bc Bits per character, typically 10

Rb Baud rate, 1200–38.4 K

L Length of message in characters

Τidle Maximum idle period between characters (ms)

Note: The Encompass 4 Reader supports baud rates between 1200 and 38.4 K.

Likewise, the sender must set a timeout delay equal to the delay of nine characters at
the current baud rate setting. For example, the time required to shift out the <eom>
character plus the time to shift in the ACK or NAK message to be received plus a pro-
cessing allowance for the receiver to process the message and check for error condi-
tions.
Thus, the sending timeout delay can be expressed as follows:
Τsend (ms) = 9 * Τchar + Τerrchk
where

Τerrckh (ms) Processing period to perform error checking by receiver

The host computer can remotely set the Encompass 4 Reader’s communications
parameters while in the command mode, but TransCore does not recommend this
action if communications conditions are marginal.
After the Encompass 4 Reader receives new communications parameters, the Encom-
pass 4 Reader issues the Done message and switches to the new configuration imme-

6-11
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

diately. The host computer switches its communications parameters immediately after
the transaction is complete.
As noted, the message initiator, such as the Encompass 4 Reader in data mode and the
host computer in command mode, starts a timeout counter at the time a message is
transmitted. If the timeout expires before receiving an acknowledgement message, a
logical NAK condition is declared, and the initiator assumes the message was received
in error. In this instance, the message is retransmitted until an acknowledgement mes-
sage is received.
The message recipient, such as the host computer in data mode and the Encompass 4
Reader in command mode, starts a timeout counter when a <som> character is
received. If the timeout expires without the receipt of an <eom>, the message acqui-
sition is aborted (reset), and the receiver waits for the next <som> character.
If the message recipient receives a second <som> character before an <eom> charac-
ter, the message acquisition is aborted (reset), and retransmission of the previous mes-
sage is assumed to be underway.
These strategies allow for recovery during periods when communications are marginal
or completely lost.
Note: It is important that the host computer limit the period during which the Encom-
pass 4 Reader remains in command mode to avoid losing tag IDs. RF is off in com-
mand mode and no tags can be read.

Reader-Addressed Failure Conditions

The Encompass 4 Reader addresses the following failure conditions.

Illegal Sequence Number (not in the range 0–9, A–F)

If the Encompass 4 Reader detects an illegal sequence number in a host command
message, it discards the received message and sends no response. If it receives an ille-
gal sequence number in an ACK message, it responds as if a NAK had been received
and retransmits the data.

Wrong Sequence Number

If the Encompass 4 Reader receives the wrong sequence number in an ACK message,
it responds as if a NAK had been received, and it retransmits the data.

Incorrect CRC
If the Encompass 4 Reader detects an incorrect CRC value in a host command mes-
sage, it discards the received message. No response is sent. If it receives an incorrect
CRC value in an ACK message, it responds as if a NAK had been received, and it
retransmits the data.

Illegal Command
If the Encompass 4 Reader receives an illegal command, it returns its standard Error
message.

6-12
 Communications Protocols

Transmission Timeout
If the Encompass 4 Reader transmits an asynchronous message and the host does not
send an ACK before the ECP timeout occurs, the Encompass 4 Reader retransmits the
message.

Receive Timeout
If the Encompass 4 Reader receives a <som> but does not receive a matching <eom>
before the ECP timeout occurs, it discards the incomplete message and resets its
receiver.

Asynchronous Message/Command Message Collision

If the Encompass 4 Reader transmits asynchronous data at the same time that the host
sends a command, the Encompass 4 Reader gives priority to receiving the command.
It processes the command and sends a message before it retransmits the asynchronous
data.

Host-Addressed Failure Conditions

The host computer addresses the following failure conditions.

Illegal or Wrong Sequence Number

If the host detects an illegal or wrong sequence number in a reader response, it retrans-
mits the command with the same sequence number. If the host detects an illegal
sequence number in an asynchronous reader transmission, it sends a NAK message.

Incorrect CRC
If the host detects an incorrect CRC value in a reader message, it retransmits the com-
mand with the same sequence number. If the host detects an incorrect CRC value in an
asynchronous reader transmission, it transmits a NAK message.

Transmission Timeout
If the Encompass 4 Reader does not respond to a host command within a specified
interval, the host software retransmits the command with the same sequence number.

Receive Timeout
If the host receives a <som> but does not receive a matching <eom> within a specified
timeout interval, it discards the incomplete message and resets its receiver.

Asynchronous Message/Command Message Collision

If the host receives an asynchronous reader transmission at the same time it transmits
a command, it ignores the asynchronous message and waits for the Encompass 4
Reader’s response. The Encompass 4 Reader retransmits asynchronous data after it
transmits the command message.

6-13
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

ECP Reliability
An undetected error is defined as a message having incorrect data or status but no par-
ity or CRC errors. An error transaction is defined as a message having either a parity
or CRC error. Laboratory testing indicates an undetected error rate of less than one
undetected error per 1,000,000 error transactions with parity enabled.
To ensure this error rate is not exceeded, the host must enable parity and adhere
closely to the timing specifications discussed previously in this chapter in the “Timing
and Synchronization” section.

CRC Calculation
The CRC used by the ECP is based on a 16-bit algorithm. The algorithm, as imple-
mented, operates on eight-bit characters, for example, seven-bit ASCII character plus
one optional parity bit. The 16-bit result is converted to four ASCII hex characters and
is appended to messages transmitted by the Encompass 4 Reader.
The Encompass 4 Reader accepts four ASCII < ` > characters (60 hex) as a wild card
CRC value in lieu of a valid four-character CRC value to facilitate testing and diag-
nostic checkout.
The Encompass 4 Reader implements the algorithm with a 512-byte lookup table to
reduce the processing overhead requirements.
To simplify the implementation of the CRC algorithm by host software developers,
several examples of the calculation are provided in C source code on the following
pages. The calculation may be performed with or without a lookup table, depending
on the trade-off between code memory and processing overhead.

Example 1 presents an example of a function (CALCCRC) that calculates the CRC

value through a call to a separate function (UPDCRC).

unsigned short calccrc(char *message)

{
unsigned short crc = 0;
for ( ; *message != (char)0;message++)
crc = updcrc(*message & 0xff, crc);
return (crc)
}

6-14
 Communications Protocols

Example 2 shows an example of UPDCRC that does not require a lookup table.

#define BITS_PER_CHAR 8
unsigned short updcrc (unsigned short ch, unsigned short
crc)
{
register short counter = BITS_PER_CHAR;
register short temp = crc;
while (--counter >= 0)
if (temp & 0x8000) {
temp <<= 1;
temp += (((ch <<= 1) & 0x0100) != 0);
temp ^= 0x1021;
}
else {
temp <<= 1;
temp += (((ch <<= 1) & 0x0100) != 0);
}
return(temp);
}

Example 3 contains an example of UPDCRC that does require a lookup table.

#define updcrc(cp, crc)( crctab[((crc >> 8) & 255)]^ (crc << 8) ^ cp

static unsigned short crctab [256] = {
0x0000, 0x1021, 0x2042, 0x3063, 0x4048, 0x50a5, 0x60c6, 0x70e7,
0x8108, 0x9129, 0xa14a, 0xb16b, 0xc18c, 0xd1ad, 0xe1ce, 0xf1ef,
0x1231, 0x0210, 0x3273, 0x2252, 0x52b5, 0x4294, 0x72f7, 0x62d6,
0x9339, 0x8318, 0xb37b, 0xa35a, 0xd3bd, 0xc39c, 0xf3ff, 0xe3de,
0x2462, 0x3443, 0x0420, 0x1401, 0x64e6, 0x74c7, 0x44a4, 0x5485,
0xa56a, 0xb54b, 0x8528, 0x9509, 0xe5ee, 0xf5cf, 0xc5ac, 0xd58d,
0x3653, 0x2672, 0x1611, 0x0630, 0x76d7, 0x66f6, 0x5695, 0x46b4,
0xb75b, 0xa77a, 0x9719, 0x8738, 0xf7df, 0xe7fe, 0xd79d, 0xc7bc,
0x48c4, 0x58e5, 0x6886, 0x78a7, 0x0840, 0x1861, 0x2802, 0x3823,
0xc9cc, 0xd9ed, 0xe98e, 0xf9af, 0x8948, 0x9969, 0xa90a, 0xb92b,
0x5af5, 0x4ad4, 0x7ab7, 0x6a96, 0x1a71, 0x0a50, 0x3a33, 0x2a12,
0xdbfd, 0xcbdc, 0xfbbf, 0xeb9e, 0x9b79, 0x8b58, 0xbb3b, 0xab1a,
0x6ca6, 0x7c87, 0x4ce4, 0x5cc5, 0x2c22, 0x3c03, 0x0c60, 0x1c41,
0xedae, 0xfd8f, 0xcdec, 0xddcd, 0xad2a, 0xbd0b, 0x8d68, 0x9d49,
0x7e97, 0x6eb6, 0x5ed5, 0x4ef4, 0x3e13, 0x2e32, 0x1e51, 0x0e70,
0xff9f, 0xefbe, 0xdfdd, 0xcffc, 0xbf1b, 0xaf3a, 0x9f59, 0x8f78,
0x9188, 0x81a9, 0xb1ca, 0xa1eb, 0xd10c, 0xc12d, 0xf14e, 0xe16f,
0x1080, 0x00a1, 0x30c2, 0x20e3, 0x5004, 0x4025, 0x7046, 0x6067,

6-15
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

0x83b9, 0x9398, 0xa3fb, 0xb3da, 0xc33d, 0xd31c, 0xe37f, 0xf35e,

0x02b1, 0x1290, 0x22f3, 0x32d2, 0x4235, 0x5214, 0x6277, 0x7256,
0xb5ea, 0xa5cb, 0x95a8, 0x8589, 0xf56e, 0xe54f, 0xd52c, 0xc50d,
0x34e2, 0x24c3, 0x14a0, 0x0481, 0x7466, 0x6447, 0x5424, 0x4405,
0xa7db, 0xb7fa, 0x8799, 0x97b8, 0xe75f, 0xf77e, 0xc71d, 0xd73c,
0x26d3, 0x36f2, 0x0691, 0x16b0, 0x6657, 0x7676, 0x4615, 0x5634,
0xd94c, 0xc96d, 0xf90e, 0xe92f, 0x99c8, 0x89e9, 0xb98a, 0xa9ab,
0x5844, 0x4865, 0x7806, 0x6827, 0x18c0, 0x08e1, 0x3882, 0x28a3,
0xcb7d, 0xdb5c, 0xeb3f, 0xfb1e, 0x8bf9, 0x9bd8, 0xabbb, 0xbb9a,
0x4a75, 0x5a54, 0x6a37, 0x7a16, 0x0af1, 0x1ad0, 0x2ab3, 0x3a92,
0xfd2e, 0xed0f, 0xdd6c, 0xcd4d, 0xbdaa, 0xad8b, 0x9de8, 0x8dc9,
0x7c26, 0x6c07, 0x5c64, 0x4c45, 0x3ca2, 0x2c83, 0x1ce0, 0x0cc1,
0xef1f, 0xff3e, 0xcf5d, 0xdf7c, 0xaf9b, 0xbfba, 0x8fd9, 0x9ff8,
0x6e17, 0x7e36, 0x4e55, 0x5e74, 0x2e93, 0x3eb2, 0x0ed1, 0x1ef0,
};

Example 4 shows an example of a function that creates the lookup table.

#include <stdio.h>
#define MAX_CHAR 256
#define BITS_CHAR 8
#define SIGN_BIT 0x8000
#define POLY 0x1021
unsigned short crctab [MAX_CHAR];
main ()
{
unsigned short ch;
unsigned short workval;
unsigned short bit;
unsigned short carry;
for (ch = 0; ch != MAX_CHAR; ch++) {
workval = ch << BITS_CHAR;
for (bit = BITS_CHAR; bit != 0; bit--) {
carry = (workval & SIGN_BIT);
workval <<= 1;
if (carry)
workval ^= POLY;
}
crctab[ch] = workval;
}
for (ch = 0; ch != MAX_CHAR; ch++)
printf("0x%04x\n", crctab[ch]);
}
6-16
 Communications Protocols

Manually Disabling ECP for Maintenance

Under certain conditions, communications between the host and Encompass 4 Reader
may be lost temporarily and maintenance may be required. The reader or host is send-
ing out a message and waiting for an acknowledgment. When the acknowledgment is
not received, the message is sent again. Additional messages are also buffered. Often
the first indication that the Encompass 4 Reader software is in an ECP “loop” is when
the user/technician sees a recurring display of the same message repeated over and
over again on the monitor. The procedure described in the following paragraphs
enables the maintenance technician to change configuration or test tag reading manu-
ally.
Assuming that the ECP timeout is at the factory default of 12.7 seconds (or other value
that allows enough time for the commands to be manually entered) the following com-
mand sequence may be used to break out of an ECP loop. This command sequence
uses four ASCII < ` > characters (60 hex) as wild card CRC values.
Note: The ASCII <`> character (60 hex) is commonly located on the ~ key.

You must acknowledge existing messages by issuing commands with the generic for-
mat:
#x@‘‘‘‘<eom>
where

# Start-of-message character

x Message sequence number. This must be the same as the

sequence number of the message being acknowledged

@ ACK (acknowledgment character)

<‘‘‘‘> Wild card CRC value for the message

<eom> End-of-message character

The following is a typical sequence after power-on limiting buffered messages.

Note: Ensure that no tags are in the field when you are performing this troubleshoot-
ing procedure.

Caution
To avoid damage to the Encompass 4 Reader that uses an external antenna, ensure
that you have connected the antenna or a dummy load to the reader before applying
power to the reader.

Reader transmission on power-up:

#0 Model …. SN <crc><eom>
Manually enter: #0@````<eom>

6-17
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Reader transmission #2 Copyright 2008 TransCore <crc><eom>

Manually enter: #2@````<eom>

Manually enter: #101‘‘‘‘<eom> this puts reader into command mode

Reader response: #1Done<crc><eom>
Manually enter: #3610‘‘‘‘<eom> this puts reader into basic protocol,
disabling ECP
reader response: Done
Enter any other desired diagnostic or directive commands in basic protocol. After
maintenance is complete enter the command:
#00 to return the reader to data mode
or
#611 to return to error correcting protocol,
and then either cycle power or issue
#100````<eom> command to return
reader to data mode

6-18
 7
Commands
 Chapter 7
Commands

This chapter discusses the host-transmitted commands that are used to

control the Encompass® 4 Reader configuration and operation.

Introduction
The Encompass 4 Reader is delivered from the factory with specified default settings
that determine how the reader operates. Commands transmitted by the host computer
can change the default settings and control additional features. The commands can be
transmitted by manually entering the commands at the host keyboard if the host is in
terminal emulation mode. The Encompass 4 Reader can also communicate with
ASCII terminals.
Note: If you are using Wiegand mode, you must connect the PC or laptop to the
Encompass 4 Reader using the RS–232 or RS–422 interface and a terminal emulation
program to send commands to the reader. You can leave the Wiegand interface con-
nected during this procedure.

Operating Modes
The Encompass 4 Reader has three modes of operation: data mode, command mode,
and download mode. The software for the Encompass 4 Reader contains two separate
programs — boot and application. The boot program has control of the Encompass 4
Reader on startup and when operating in download mode. The application program
has control of the Encompass 4 Reader during data mode and command mode opera-
tion and holds the application code. Together, they control the Encompass 4 Reader in
the three modes of operation.

Data Mode
The Encompass 4 Reader is in the data mode upon power-up. While in the data mode,
the Encompass 4 Reader sends all communications as data messages, such as tag IDs
and reports, to the host computer. Reports provide information on input status changes
(input0 and input1), a presence without tag report, and buffer overflow information.
The host computer can send only two commands to the Encompass 4 Reader while in
data mode:
• Command #01 Switch To Command Mode changes the Encompass 4 Reader
from the data mode to the command mode. See “01 Switch to Command Mode”
on page 7-5.

7-3
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Note: The Encompass 4 Reader transmits ID codes to the host computer when the
Encompass 4 Reader is in data mode. If the Encompass 4 Reader remains in the com-
mand mode with tags passing through the read zone, all tag IDs are not reported.

Command Mode
While the Encompass 4 Reader is in the command mode, the host computer sends
commands to the Encompass 4 Reader that can be used to control the operation and
configuration of the reader. After the Encompass 4 Reader receives a command, it
transmits a command response message. Typically, the command message
contains Error, Done, or data relating specifically to the command request. These
messages may be of variable length since some commands require information as part
of the message; for example, Display Wiegand Mode Status.
Communications can be lost if the host computer attempts to send certain commands
under marginal communications conditions. For example, if the host computer trans-
mits the command request to change the baud rate and the Encompass 4 Reader prop-
erly receives the request and transmits the Done message, one of the two following
conditions may occur:
• If the host computer receives the Done message, then both the host and the
Encompass 4 Reader switch to the new baud rate, and communications are main-
tained.
Note: In many applications, the host must be set to the new baud rate as it will not
change automatically.

Note: The Encompass 4 Reader changes the baud rate immediately after issuing the
Done message.

• However, if the host does not receive the Done message transmitted by the
Encompass 4 Reader, the host assumes that the command was not properly sent
and does not switch to the new baud rate, causing a loss of communications.

Caution
The host computer should not attempt to change communications parameters or
protocols during marginal communications conditions; otherwise, a loss of commu-
nications can result.

Download Mode
In download mode, the Encompass 4 Reader allows the host to download new soft-
ware.
While in download mode, the reader communications port parameters are fixed at the
following factory-default settings: 38400 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, soft-
ware flow control (XON/XOFF), basic protocol.
While in download mode, the Encompass 4 Reader turns RF off, does not process
tags, and does not echo host commands.

7-4
 Commands

Command List
Reader commands are divided into groups based on primary function. The following
sections provide information about each command in command number order. Refer
to Appendix D for listings of commands in numerical and alphabetical order.
In the following text, the symbols < and > represent variable message data. These
symbols are not part of the message syntax.
Hex digits (0–9, A–F) in either uppercase or lowercase characters may be used in data
strings and for hex digits A–F.

Reader Mode Control — Command Group 0

Group 0 commands control reader mode. The mode determines whether the reader is
transmitting data to or receiving data from a host computer or terminal.

00 Switch to Data Mode (Factory Default)

Command #00 switches the reader to data mode, which allows the reader to transmit
tag data (ID codes) to the host. The reader enters data mode on power up.
While operating in data mode, the reader accepts the following commands:
• Command #01 Switch to Command Mode

Reader response:
Done

01 Switch to Command Mode

Command #01 switches the reader to command mode, which allows the reader to
accept commands from a host or terminal. While in command mode, the reader turns
RF off and does not acquire tags.
Reader response:
Done

06 Transmit Buffer Entry

Command #06 allows the host to request data (tag IDs and reports) from the reader.
This command is supported if ECP is selected (command #611) and buffer control
has been enabled (command #6161). If the reader receives command #06 and it has
data in its message buffer, it transmits the buffered message of highest priority. Report
data is not transmitted until all tag IDs have been transmitted.
If the reader’s message buffer is empty, it sends the Done message. The reader returns
an Error message if it receives this command when ECP and/or the buffer control
have not been enabled.

7-5
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Reader message:
Done Buffer empty
Error Buffer control mode not enabled
Message IDs or reports in buffer

Communications Port Control — Command

Group 1
Group 1 commands configure the parameters used by the Encompass 4 Reader to
communicate with a host computer or terminal. These commands set baud rate, stop
bits, parity, and end-of-line delay.

100N Select Baud Rate

Command #100N selects the reader baud rate. The factory-default setting is 9600
baud. The N variable specifies the baud rate shown in Table 7-1.

Table 7-1 Select Baud Rate Commands

Command Baud Rate Selected

1002 1200

1003 2400

1004 4800

1005 9600 (factory default)

1006 19.2 K

1007 38.4 K

Caution
If ECP is enabled, ensure that the ECP timeout is sufficient for the new baud rate.
See “Timing and Synchronization” on page 6-11.

Reader response:
Done

101N Select Stop Bits

Command #101N selects the number of stop bits for reader character transmission.
The factory default setting is 1 stop bit. The N variable specifies the number of stop
bits as indicated in Table 7-2.

7-6
 Commands

Table 7-2 Select Stop Bits Commands

Command Stop Bits Selected

1010 1 (factory default)

1011 2

Reader response:
Done

102N Select Parity

Command #102N selects the reader parity setting. The factory-default setting is par-
ity disabled. The N variable specifies parity as shown in Table 7-3.

Table 7-3 Select Parity Commands

Command Data Bits Parity Selected

1020 8 Disable parity (factory default)

1021 7 Select even parity

1022 7 Select odd parity

Reader response:
Done

Command Group 2
Group 2 commands control the real-time clock which maintains the Encompass 4
internal time and date. This time and date can be appended to IDs, error messages, and
sensor input reports. An internal battery supports the clock, so time and date are
preserved if main power is lost.

20 Set Time
Command #20 sets the time. Enter the time in the proper format: two-digit decimal
entries with no spaces between characters and using colons as
delimiters. The entry format is as follows:
20HH:MM:SS or 20HH:MM:SS:hh
where
HH represents hours (00 to 23).
MM represents minutes (00 to 59).

7-7
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

SS represents seconds (00 to 59).

hh represents hundredths of a second (00 to 99).
: is the time delimiter.
If hundredths of a second is not specified, the reader sets the hundredths register to 00.
Reader response:
Done

21 Set Date
Command #21 sets the date. Enter the date in the proper format: two-digit decimal
entries with no spaces between characters and using forward slashes “/” as delimiters.
The entry format is as follows:
21MM/DD/YY

where
MM represents the month (01 to 12).
DD represents the day (01 to 31).
YY represents the last two digits of the year (00 to 99).
/ is the date delimiter.
Reader response:
Done

22 Display Time and Date

Command #22 displays the reader’s current time and date. One space separates the
time and the date output.
Reader message:
HH:MM:SS.hh MM/DD/YY
where
HH represents hours.
MM represents minutes.
SS represents seconds.
hh represents hundredths of seconds.
: is the time delimiter.
MM represents the month.
DD represents the day.
YY represents the last two digits of the year.
/ is the date delimiter.

7-8
 Commands

Append Information — Command Group 3

Group 3 commands append useful information to reader transmissions, such as IDs,
error messages, and sensor input reports. Auxiliary information such as reader num-
ber, antenna number (or manual entry code), number of times the previous tag was
read, and sensor input status can be appended to the ID using the Group 3 commands.

30N Append Time and Date Selection

Command #30N selects the option of appending the time and date to transmitted IDs,
error messages, presence without tag reports, and input status change reports. The
factory default setting is time and date appended (command #302).
The reader returns an Error message if its tag buffer contains data. The reset reader
command #63 may be transmitted to clear the buffer; however, tag ID data will not be
reported. If this is unacceptable, allow the buffer to empty before re-issuing append
time and date command #30N. Append Time and Date commands are shown in Table
7-4

Table 7-4 Append Time and Date Commands

Command Append Option

300 No time and date appended

302 Time and date appended (factory default)

The reader transmits messages with time and date appended as follows. One space
separates the time from the date.
<string>&<HH:MM:SS.hh MM/DD/YY>
where
string is a tag ID, error message, or report.
& separates <string> from the time and date.
HH:MM:SS is the time delimiter.
MM/DD/YY is the date delimiter.
Reader response:
Done

31N Append Auxiliary Information Selection

Command #31N selects the option of appending auxiliary information to transmitted
IDs, presence-without-tag reports, and input status change reports. Auxiliary informa-
tion is not appended to error messages. The factory-default setting is no auxiliary
information appended. The N variable specifies whether or not auxiliary information
is to be appended. Append Auxiliary Information commands are shown in Table 7-5.

7-9
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table 7-5 Append Auxiliary Information Commands

Command Append Option

310 No auxiliary information appended (factory default)

311 Auxiliary information appended

The reader transmits messages with auxiliary information appended as:

<message data>%<xx-y-zz-q>
where

% separates the auxiliary information and signals the host

computer that auxiliary information is appended.

xx reader ID. Value can be set with command #60NN.

- auxiliary information delimiter

y antenna number. Value fixed at 0.

zz number of reads (00 to FF hexadecimal) of the previous tag

q current status of input0 and input1 (0 to 3). Refer to

“526 Display I/O Status” on page 7-21. These values are inverted
if input inversion is enabled with command 6941.
Reader response:
Done

ID Filtering — Command Group 4

Group 4 commands set criteria for filtering (buffering or discarding) ID codes. These
commands are useful for eliminating duplicate ID codes and selecting the type of tags
read by the Encompass 4 Reader.

40 Transmit All ID Codes

Command #40 instructs the reader to transmit all IDs without regard for uniqueness.
This command can be useful when tuning the lane and mapping the footprint or per-
forming diagnostics.
After diagnostics are complete, you may want to reinstate the uniqueness check using
command #410N Select Unique ID Code Criteria.
Reader response:
Done

7-10
 Commands

410N Select Unique ID Code Criteria (Anti-passback Feature)

Command #410N instructs the reader to buffer and transmit ID codes according to
the following test: an ID is read if previously decoded IDs have changed value at
least N+1 times since the new ID was last received. IDs that do not pass the test are not
read. The factory-default setting is command #4100, which selects a separation of
one ID. Variable N specifies ID separation as shown in Table 7-6.

Table 7-6 Unique ID Code Criteria

Command Uniqueness Criteria

4100 Separation of 1 ID (factory default)

4101 Separation of 2 IDs

4102 Separation of 3 IDs

4103 Separation of 4 IDs

Each time the reader receives a tag ID, it compares the ID with the contents of a com-
parison register. This register contains the following two items:
Item 1 Most recently acquired ID (different from Item 2)
Item 2 Second-most recently acquired ID (different from Item 3)
Item 3 Third-most recently acquired ID (different from Item 4)
Item 4 Fourth-most recently acquired ID
When the uniqueness filter is set to separation of one ID, the newly acquired ID is
transmitted only if it is different from the first item. Separation of two IDs allows
transmission if the new ID is different from Items 1 and 2 in the comparison register.
Separation of three and four IDs transmit the new ID only if it is different from the
first three and the first four items, respectively.
Note: A new ID can fail the filter test and not be transmitted; however, it remains
stored in the comparison register.

The uniqueness test has a two-minute time limit. If an ID is buffered, it will not be
accepted again unless it arrives at the reader more than two minutes from the previous
arrival or until the receipt of one or more other IDs reset the uniqueness.
Reader response:
Done

420N Select Valid ID Code Criteria

Command #420N directs the reader to validate an ID received only after it has been
obtained a specified number of times in sequence. Values for N are 0 through 3 (Table
7-7). The factory setting is one acquisition (N = 0).

7-11
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table 7-7 Select Valid Code Commands and Frames

Command Valid Code Frames

4200 1 (factory default)

4201 2

4202 3

4203 4

The validation procedure is executed before the unique ID test (Select Unique ID
Code Criteria [#410N] commands). IDs that do not pass the validation test are not
reported.
For example, command #4203 specifies that the same ID must be obtained from the
antenna/RF module 4 times in succession before it is considered for the uniqueness
test. This feature is useful in installations where RF reflections may cause a single tag
to be read multiple times or where an occasional ID might be read from fringe areas

43 Buffer All ID Codes

Command #43 buffers all acquired ID codes. It effectively cancels any uniqueness
criteria previously set by select unique ID code criteria command 410N.
Note: Command #43 is for diagnostic purposes only.

After diagnostics are complete, reset the select unique ID code criteria using
command 410N.
Reader response:
Done

440 Reset Uniqueness

Command 440 causes the ID filtering process set by Select Unique ID Code Criteria
(#410N) to restart. It is used in conjunction with the Variable Timeout #44N) com-
mands. This command provides a one-time reset at which point the previously set
time-out interval resumes.

44N Set Uniqueness Timeout

Places a time limit on the uniqueness criterion set by Select Unique ID Code Criteria
(#410N). The parameter N sets the number of minutes on the time-out clock. The
factory setting is two minutes (N = 1).

7-12
 Commands

Command Time-Out Clock

#441 2 minutes (factory setting)
#442 15 seconds
#443 30 seconds

Entering these commands effectively expires the time-out clock, which erases all cur-
rent IDs in the comparison register. In effect, the first ID that is acquired after the
clock expires always appears to be new and is stored. Newly acquired IDs are only
tested against IDs that are registered after the clock resets.
The time-out clock is continually reset (does not expire) as long as the reader receives
the same tag ID. For example, assume that the time-out clock is set for 2 minutes and
there is a railcar parked on a siding in front of the reader. Without this reset feature, the
railcar’s ID would be reported every 2 minutes (each time the time-out clock expired).

450 Disable Wiegand Mode (Factory Default)

Command #450 is a default set in the factory to disable Wiegand mode.
Reader response:
Done

451 Enable Wiegand Mode

Command #451 enables Wiegand mode, which allows the reader to transmit data in a
format that emulates the output of a magnetic card reader.
In Wiegand mode, the reader transmits Wiegand-formatted tag data through the Wie-
gand interface and ASCII data (the reader accepts reader commands and responds)
through the serial port interface. The reader outputs data from Wiegand-programmed
tags via the Wiegand interface (the red/blue pair for data1/data0; yellow/black pair for
logic ground). Tags that are not Wiegand-formatted are not transmitted through the
Wiegand interface or the serial port when in Wiegand mode, although the tag lock
relay is activated on any tag acquired.
Reader response:
Done

452 Disable Tag Translation Mode (Factory Default)

Command #452 disables tag translation mode. Incoming full-frame tags will be
directly converted to ASCII. They will not be translated from Association of
American Railroads (AAR) and American Trucking Associations (ATA) format to
ASCII.
Reader message:
Done

7-13
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

453 Enable Tag Translation Mode

Command #453 enables the translation of tags in AAR and ATA formats. Specific
data fields, such as owner ID and car number, will be extracted from these tags,
translated according to AAR or ATA standards, and converted to ASCII. Tags that are
not programmed in AAR or ATA format will be directly converted to ASCII. The
reader will not attempt to translate data from half-frame or dual-frame tags.
Reader message:
Done

454 Disable Multi-tag Sort (Factory Default)

Command #454 is a default set in the factory to disable the multi-tag sort function.
Reader response:
Done

455 Enable Multi-tag Sort

Command #455 enables the multi-tag sort function that allows the reader to identify
unique tags within a group of Intellitag-based tags. Multi-tag sort allows full operation
of the tags and reader to be carried out with any number of tags in the presence of the
reader.
Reader response:
Done
Note: Enabling the multi-tag sort function adversely affects the vehicle speed at
which tags may be read. If there is only one Intellitag-based tag in the vehicles of the
target population, multi-tag sort should be disabled.

456 Enable eGo Plus Tag Initialization During Multi-tag Sort

(Factory Default)
Command #456 enables the reader to send the eGo Plus Tag initialize command as
part of the multi-tag sort function. When the reader sends the eGo Plus Tag initialize
command, all tags in the RF field reenter the sort process.
Reader response:
Done

457 Disable eGo Plus Tag Initialization During Multi-tag Sort

Command #457 disables the reader from sending the eGo Plus Tag initialize com-
mand as part of the multi-tag sort function. Any eGo Plus Tags already identified by
the reader during the sort process will not be re-identified as long as they remain pow-
ered in the RF field. The reader will only identify new tags that come into the RF field
or tags that do not remain powered in the RF field.
Reader response:
Done

7-14
 Commands

458 Disable Second Alternate Group Select (Factory Default)

Command #458 is a default set in the factory to disable the second alternate group
select function.
Reader response:
Done

459 Enable Second Alternate Group Select

Command #459 enables the second alternate group select function that allows the
reader to distinguish tags meeting specific criteria pre-programmed into the tags.

Caution
When second alternate group select is enabled, tags not programmed to meet the
specified criteria will not be read.

Reader response:
Done

46NN Set Wiegand Retransmit Interval

Command #46NN sets the time delay to control the reader retransmission of Wiegand
data of a tag remaining in the read zone where NN is a hexadecimal code from 01 to
FF.
Note: The actual value of the Wiegand retransmit interval may vary depending on the
operative tag read mode and the type of tag in the read field.

For example, 10 = 16 seconds and FF = 255 seconds. The factory default is 4601 (1
second).
Uppercase or lowercase characters are allowed for NN; for example, hex digits A
through F or a through f.
Reader response:
Done

480 Disable ATA

Command #480 disables the reader from reading ATA protocol tags.

481 Enable ATA

Command #481 enables the reader to read ATA protocol data from tags if the reader
is programmed to read this tag protocol.

482 Disable eGo

Command #482 disables the reader from reading protocol eGo data from tags.

483 Enable eGo

Command #483 enables the reader to read factory-programmed eGo data from tags if
the reader is programmed to read this tag protocol.

7-15
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

484 Disable SeGo

Command #484 disables the reader from reading SeGo protocol data from tags.

485 Enable SeGo

Command #485 enables the reader to read SeGo protocol data from tags if the reader
is programmed to read this tag protocol.

486 Disable IAG

Command #486 disables the reader from reading IAG protocol data from tags.

487 Enable IAG

Command #487 enables the reader to read IAG protocol data from tags if the reader
is programmed to read this tag protocol.

488 Disable eATA

Command #488 disables the reader from reading factory-programmed eATA data
from tags.

489 Enable eATA

Command #489 enables the reader to read factory-programmed eATA data from eGo
Plus or eGo tags. This option must be enabled to obtain Wiegand data from eGo Plus
or eGo tags.

490 Disable Third Alternate Group Select (Factory Default)

Command #490 is a default set in the factory to disable the third alternate group
select function.
Reader response:
Done

491 Enable Third Alternate Group Select

Command #491 enables the third alternate group select function that allows the
reader to distinguish tags meeting specific criteria pre-programmed into the tags.

Caution
When third alternate group select is enabled, tags not programmed to meet the spec-
ified criteria will not be read.

Reader response:
Done

492 Disable Fourth Alternate Group Select (Factory Default)

Command #492 is a default set in the factory to disable the fourth alternate group
select function.
Reader response:
Done
7-16
 Commands

493 Enable Fourth Alternate Group Select

Command #493 enables the fourth alternate group select function that allows the
reader to distinguish tags meeting specific criteria pre-programmed into the tags.

Caution
When fourth alternate group select is enabled, tags not programmed to meet the
specified criteria will not be read.

Reader response:
Done

494 Disable Fifth Alternate Group Select (Factory Default)

Command #494 is a default set in the factory to disable the fifth alternate group select
function.
Reader response:
Done

495 Enable Fifth Alternate Group Select

Command #495 enables the fifth alternate group select function that allows the reader
to distinguish tags meeting specific criteria pre-programmed into the tags.

Caution
When fifth alternate group select is enabled, tags not programmed to meet the spec-
ified criteria will not be read.

Reader response:
Done

496 Disable Alternate Group Select (Factory Default)

Command #496 disables the alternate group select function that allows the reader to
distinguish tags meeting specific criteria pre-programmed into the tags.
Reader response:
Done

497 Enable Alternate Group Select

Command #497 enables the alternate group select function that allows the reader to
distinguish tags meeting specific criteria pre-programmed into the tags.
Reader response:
Done

7-17
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Reader Status — Command Group 5

Group 5 commands provide status reports on the parameters and operation of the
reader.

505 Display Software Version

Command #505 displays the reader model number, software version information, and
assigned serial number.
Reader message:
Model E4 Series Ver X.XX SNYYYYYY
where

X.XX Version number

YYYYYY Serial number of the unit, skipping the fourth character printed on
the reader product label

506 Display Hardware Configuration Information

Command #506 displays hardware configuration information stored in the reader
memory by the user. Hardware configuration information is empty by default until
you set the information to any 20 character ASCII string desired using command
#696S...S.
Reader response:
An ASCII string from 1 to 20 characters in length

510 Display RF Transceiver FPGA Version

Command #510 displays RF FPGA VER = XX.XX

511 Display RF Transceiver I Filter Chip Version

Command #511 displays FIL IC I VER = XX.XX

512 Display RF Transceiver Q Filter Chip Version

Command #512 displays FIL IC Q VER = XX.XX

513 Display DSP Board Actel Version

Command #513 displays DSP FPGA VER = XX.XX

520 Display Power Fail Bit

Command #520 displays the value of the reader power fail bit. The power fail bit
changes from 0 to 1 when power to the reader is interrupted. To reset the bit, use com-
mand #63 Reset Reader or command #65 Reset Power Fail Bit. On initial power-up,
the host should transmit one of these two commands to clear the power fail bit.
Reader message:
PWRB P<0 to 1>R0

7-18
 Commands

where

P0 No power failure detected

P1 Power failure detected

R0 Not applicable to Encompass 4 Reader

521 Display Reader ID Number

Command #521 displays the reader ID that is sent in the auxiliary data field.
Reader message:
RDID xx
where xx = 01 to FF (hexadecimal)

522 Display Communications Port Parameters

Command #522 displays the selected communications port parameters, including the
baud rate (#100N), the number of stop bits (#101N), the parity scheme (#102N), and
the end-of-line delay.
Reader message:
MAIN B<2 to 7> S<0 to 1> P<0 to 2> D0
where

B2 1200 baud

B3 2400 baud

B4 4800 baud

B5 9600 baud (factory default)

B6 19.2 kbps

B7 38.4 kbps

S0 one stop bit (factory default)

S1 two stop bits

P0 no parity (factory default)

P1 even parity

P2 odd parity

D0 00 ms end-of-line delay (fixed)

7-19
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

One space is required between each value. For example, if factory default settings are
assigned, the reader message is
MAIN B5 S0 P0 D0
indicating 9600 baud, one stop bit, no parity, and 0 ms end-of-line delay.
Note: The information transmitted in response to command #522 applies to data and
command mode operation only. While operating in download mode, default communi-
cations parameters are always used.

524 Display Appended Information Status

Command #524 displays the information being appended to the reader transmissions.
Command #31N appends information. Append time and date are not available to the
Encompass 4 Reader.
Reader message:
IDAP T<0> D<0> X<0 to 1>
where

T0 Time not appended

T1 Time appended (not valid for the Encompass 4 Reader)

D0 Date not appended

D1 Date appended (not valid for the Encompass 4 Reader)

X0 Auxiliary information not appended (factory default)

X1 Auxiliary information appended

One space is required between each value. For example, if factory-default settings are
assigned, the reader response is
IDAP T0 D0 X0
indicating time, date, and auxiliary information not appended.
Note: Time and date may be appended to ID codes, error messages, presence without
tag reports, and input status change reports. Auxiliary information may only be
appended to ID codes, presence without tag reports, and input change reports.

525 Display Communications Protocol Status

Command #525 displays the status of command #61N Selected Communications
Protocol, command #614N Selected Mode of Flow Control, and command #612NN
ECP Timeout.
Reader response:
ECPS P<0 to 1> T<01 to FF> X<0 to 2> S0

7-20
 Commands

where

P0 Basic protocol enabled (factory default)

P1 ECP enabled
Txx ECP timeout where xx = 01 to FE (hexadecimal)
Timeout (ms) = 50 * xx
If xx = FF timeout disabled
X0 Flow control disabled
X1 Software flow control enabled (factory default)
X2 Hardware flow control enabled
S0 start of message character is #
For example, if factory default settings are assigned, the reader message is:
ECPS P0 TFE X1 S0
which means basic protocol enabled, an ECP timeout of 254 (12,700 ms, 12.7 sec),
software flow control enabled, and start of message character is #.

526 Display I/O Status

Command #526 displays the current input/output (I/O) status. The reader message
indicates whether outputs are being controlled externally by the host through com-
mand #620N Output Control or internally through command #621 Predefined Output
Mode. It also displays the current status of two outputs, two inputs, and the selected
output pulse duration that is set by command #67N.
Reader response:
IOST C<0 to 1> O<0 to 3> I<0 to 3> D<0 to F>

where

C0 Host controls outputs

C1 Predefined output mode

O0 Both outputs off

O1 Output0 on

O2 Output1 on

O3 Both outputs on

I0 Both inputs false

I1 Input0 true

I2 Input1 true

7-21
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

I3 Both inputs true

D0 4 ms output pulse duration

D1 8 ms output pulse duration

D2 12 ms output pulse duration

D3 16 ms output pulse duration

D4 20 ms output pulse duration

D5 24 ms output pulse duration

D6 32 ms output pulse duration

D7 40 ms output pulse duration

D8 48 ms output pulse duration

D9 60 ms output pulse duration

DA 76 ms output pulse duration

DB 152 ms output pulse duration

DC 228 ms output pulse duration (factory default)

DD 300 ms output pulse duration

DE 376 ms output pulse duration

DF 752 ms output pulse duration

Note: The first character of the output pulse duration value is alpha; the second char-
acter is numeric.

Table 7-8 shows the output0 and output1 open/closed conditions for the output status
displays.

Table 7-8 Open/Closed Conditions for Output Status

Output0 Wire Pair Output1 Wire Pair

Output
Status
Orange/Black Brown/Black White/Black Green/Black

O0 Closed Open Closed Open

O1 Open Closed Closed Open

O2 Closed Open Open Closed

O3 Open Closed Open Closed

7-22
 Commands

Table 7-9 shows the input0 and input1 open/closed conditions for the input status dis-
plays.

Table 7-9 Open/Closed Conditions for Input Status

Input0 Wire Pair Input1 Wire Pair

Input
Status
Green/Red Blue/Black

I0 Open Open

I1 Closed Open

I2 Open Closed

I3 Closed Closed

527 Display RF Status

Command #527 displays the current status of the RF module. The reader response
indicates whether RF is controlled externally by the host, set by command #640N RF
Control, or internally by input set by command #641. Command #527 also displays
the current RF status and the uniqueness timeout.
Note: If you enter RF settings using command #642NN, the display command for RF
output frequency, F is "Fxx" and indicates use of the backward-compatible frequency
entry method.

Reader message:
RFST C<0 to 1> O<0 to 1> T<1 to 3> Fxxx Rxx Gxx Axx Ixx
where

C0 RF controlled by host

C1 RF controlled by presence sensor on input0, the red/green pair

(factory default)

O0 RF off

O1 RF on

T1 Uniqueness timeout of two minutes

T2 Uniqueness timeout of 15 seconds

T3 Uniqueness timeout of 30 seconds

Fxxx RF output frequency, xxx = 000 to 118 hexadecimal offset in 250

kHz from 860 MHz. If an invalid frequency value is stored
(corrupted NVRAM), then xxx = “XXX” to indicate an error in
the frequency setting.

7-23
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Rxx Tag decoder range (distance) for ATA tags, xx = 00 to 1F

hexadecimal range value

Gxx Tag decoder range (distance) for eGo and eGo Plus tags, xx = 00
to 1F hexadecimal range value

Axx RF power attenuation, where 00 is maximum output power and

0A is minimum output power (10dB less than maximum power).

Ixx IAG RF power attenuation, where 00 is maximum output power

and 0F is minimum output power (15 dB less than maximum
power)

For example, if factory default settings are assigned, the reader message is
RFST C1 O0 T1 Fxx R1F G1F A00 I04
which means that RF is enabled by presence sensor on input0, RF signal off, unique-
ness timeout of two minutes, RF output frequency has not been set, maximum RF out-
put range for ATA tags, maximum RF output range for eGo and eGo Plus tags, full RF
power, and IAG power set at 4 dB attenuation.

529 Display Presence Input Status

Command #529 displays the parameters associated with presence detection and RF
control. The reader’s message indicates if presence without tag reports are enabled/
disabled (#690N Select Presence without Tag Report Option), if input inversion is
enabled/disabled (#694N Select Input Inversion Option), and the minimum presence
true period (always true). The reader’s message also reports the selected RF timeout
(#693N Select RF Timeout Period) and the selected means of RF-off control (#692N
Select RF Control Algorithm). If presence without tag reports is enabled (#6901
Enable Presence without Tag Reports), the reader transmits a report if a presence is
detected without the subsequent acquisition of a valid tag.
Note: RF timeout values vary depending on the operative tag read mode and the type
of tag in the read field. All times are approximate.

Reader message:
PRST P<0 to 1> D0 A<0 to 2> T<0 to F> I<0 to 1>
where

P0 Presence without tag reports disabled (factory default)

P1 Presence without tag reports enabled

D0 Minimum presence true period of 0 ms (fixed)

A0 RF off on timeout only

A1 RF off on timeout or tag

7-24
 Commands

A2 RF off on timeout or presence condition false (factory default)

T0 RF timeout of 0 ms (always expired)

T1 4 ms

T2 8 ms

T3 12 ms

T4 20 ms

T5 24 ms

T6 32 ms

T7 48 ms

T8 60 ms

T9 92 ms

TA 152 ms

TB 300 ms

TC 452 ms

TD 600 ms

TE 752 ms

TF RF timeout infinite, never expires (factory default)

I0 input inversion disabled (factory default)

I1 input inversion enabled

For example, if factory default settings are assigned, the reader message is
PRST P0 D0 A2 TF I0
which means that presence without tag reports is disabled, minimum presence true
period is 0, RF off control on timeout or presence false, infinite RF timeout, and input
inversion disabled.

530 Display RF0 Filter Status

Command #530 displays the parameter set for the RF input, including the selected
unique ID code criteria (#410N Select Unique ID Code Criteria) and the valid ID code
criteria, which are fixed at one acquisition.

7-25
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Reader message:
RF0S U<0 to 2> V0
where

U0 One ID separation (factory default)

U1 Two ID separations

U2 Transmit all IDs

V0 Valid ID code criteria of one acquisition (fixed)

For example, if factory default settings are assigned, the reader message is
RF0S U0 V0
which means separation of one ID for uniqueness filtering and a valid ID code criteria
of one acquisition.

532 Display Wiegand Mode Status

Command #532 displays the Wiegand mode status as either enabled or disabled.
Reader message:
TOF <0 to 1>
where

0 Wiegand mode disabled

1 Wiegand mode enabled

533 Display Wiegand Retransmit Interval

Command #533 displays the Wiegand retransmit interval. This interval specifies the
delay in seconds before the reader retransmits Wiegand data for a tag still in the read
zone. The factory default is 1 second.
Reader message:
WTI <01 to FF>
where 01 to FF = seconds (1–255) in hexadecimal.
Note: The actual value of the Wiegand retransmit interval may vary depending on the
operative tag read mode and the type of tag in the read field.

For example, 10 = 16 seconds and FF = 255 seconds. The retransmit interval in ATA
tag read mode is about twice these values.

534 Display Tag Translation Mode Status

Command #534 displays tag translation mode status, enabled or disabled. If tag
translation mode is enabled, incoming full-frame tags in AAR or ATA format are

7-26
 Commands

translated according to ISO standards. Refer to “452 Disable Tag Translation Mode
(Factory Default)” on page 7-13 and “453 Enable Tag Translation Mode” on page 7-
14 for more information.
Reader message:
TT <0 to 1>
where
0 tag translation mode disabled
1 tag translation mode enabled

535 Display Buffer Control Status

Command #535 displays buffer control mode status, enabled or disabled. Refer to
“6160 Disable Buffer Control Mode (Factory Default)” on page 7-31 and “6161
Enable Buffer Control Mode” on page 7-32 for more information.
Reader message:
BCM <0 to 1>
where
0 buffer control mode disabled
1 buffer control mode enabled

536 Display Dual-Frame Processing Mode

Command #536 displays the selected dual-frame processing mode. The mode used
determines if frame A or frame B of a dual-frame tag resets uniqueness and which
frame(s) are transmitted to the host, A, B, or both.
Reader message:
DUAL <0 to 3>
where
0 reset uniqueness on A, transmit A
1 reset uniqueness on B, transmit B
2 reset uniqueness on A, transmit both A and B
3 reset uniqueness on B, transmit both A and B

537 Display Echo Status

Command #537 displays echo mode status. In basic protocol (#610 Select Basic
Protocol), the reader may be configured to enable (#6171 Enable Echo Mode) or dis-
able (#6170 Disable Echo Mode) the echo of received commands. Refer to sections
6170 Disable Echo Mode and “6171 Enable Echo Mode (Factory Default)” on page 7-
33 for more information.
Reader message:
ECHO <0 to 1>

7-27
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

where

0 Echo status disabled (factory default)

1 Echo status enabled

540 Display Flash Checksum

Command #540 displays the flash memory checksum.
Reader message:
PCKS I0000 Exxxx
where

0000 Not applicable to the Encompass 4 Reader

xxxx Represents the four-byte ASCII representation of the flash

memory checksum

543 Display Boot Checksum

Command #543 displays the boot ROM checksum.
Reader message:
BCKS xxxx
where xxxx represents the four-byte ASCII representation of the boot ROM check-
sum.

550 Display Periodic Check Tag Status

Command #550 displays parameters for the periodic check tag function.
Reader message:
SCTS M0 (fixed)

551 Display Selected Check Tag Option

Command #551 displays the currently selected check tag option.
Reader message:
CTAG 0 (fixed)

560 Request Sensor Status Change

Command #560 displays the sensor status change reporting. Status change reporting
may be disabled by command #82N Select Input Status Change Report Option.
Reader message:
SSTC E<0 to 1>M<0 to 3>
where

E0 Input status change reports disabled (factory default)

7-28
 Commands

E1 Input status change reports enabled

M0 Reporting disabled (factory default)

M1 Changes on input0 reported

M2 Changes on input1 reported

M3 Changes on either input reported

For example, if factory default settings are assigned, the reader message is
SSTC E0 M0
which means that input status change reports are disabled on both input0 and input1.

570 Display Operating Mode Status

Command #570 displays the currently selected tag read mode.
Reader response:
ATA:<E, D> eGo:<I, F, D> SeGo:<I, F, D> IAG:<E, D> Sort:<E, D>
where

I ID (64 bits)

E Enabled

F Full transaction (eATA)

D Disabled

577 Report Buffered Handshakes

Command #577 reports the buffered handshakes.
Reader message:
XX
where
XX is number of handshakes

Reader Control Functions — Command Group 6

Group 6 commands set reader control functions such as reader ID, communication
protocol, output pulse, and RF control.

60NN Set Reader ID Number

Command #60NN sets the reader ID that will be sent in the auxiliary data field (com-
mand #311). Uppercase or lowercase characters are allowed for NN; for example, hex
digits A though F or a through f

7-29
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

where NN = 00 to FF (hex for 0 to 255, factory default = 00).

Reader response:
Done

610 Select Basic Communication Protocol (Factory Default)

Command #610 enables the basic communications protocol. Refer to “Basic Proto-
col” on page 6-4 for more information.
Reader response:
Done

611 Select Error Correcting Protocol

Command #611 enables the error correcting protocol. Refer to “Error Correcting Pro-
tocol” on page 6-4 for more information.
Reader response:
Done

Caution
Do not switch to ECP (command #611 Select Error Correcting Protocol) unless
the host is prepared to acknowledge each reader transmission.

612NN Select Error Correcting Protocol Timeout

Command #612NN selects the timeout interval for ECP. This timeout applies to the
transmission of tag, report, and error messages and to the receipt of host commands.
The transmit timeout is initiated immediately after the end-of-message sequence CR/
LF is transmitted. If the host does not acknowledge the message within the specified
interval, the reader times out and retransmits the message.
The receive timeout is initiated upon receipt of the start-of-message character (#). If
the end-of-message character (CR) is not received within the specified interval, the
reader discards the partially received message and resets its receiver.
Uppercase or lowercase characters are allowed for NN; for example, hex digits A
through F or a through f.
The value for NN specifies the timeout interval as follows:

ms 50 * NN for NN = 01 to FE (1–254)

FE Factory default (12,700 ms, 12.7 seconds)

FF Disables the ECP timeout

Reader response:
Done

Caution
Ensure that the ECP timeout is sufficient for a given baud rate. See “Timing and
Synchronization” on page 6-11.
7-30
 Commands

613 Enable Data Inquiry Protocol

Command #613 enable the data inquiry protocol.
Reader response:
Done

614N Select Flow Control Option

Command #614N selects the flow control option for reader-to-host communications.
The factory default setting is software flow control (XON/XOFF) enabled. In down-
load mode, flow control is not host-selectable; it is fixed at the default setting. How-
ever, during data mode and command mode operation, the following flow control
options are available. The N variable specifies flow control as shown in Table 7-10.

Table 7-10 Flow Control Commands

Command Flow Control Option

6140 Disable flow control

6141 Enable software flow control (factory default)

6142 Enable hardware flow control

Reader response:
Done
If the reader is configured for software flow control (XON/XOFF), it stops transmit-
ting if it receives an XOFF character (host software command 13H). It does not
resume transmitting until it receives an XON character (host software command 11H).
If the reader is configured for hardware flow control (RTS/CTS, request to send/clear
to send), it stops transmission if it detects that the CTS line is no longer asserted. It
resumes transmission when this line is asserted again.
Note: TransCore recommends that XON/XOFF flow control be disabled while using
the ECP.

6160 Disable Buffer Control Mode (Factory Default)

Command #6160 is used to disable buffer control. Buffer control is an ECP option that
prevents unsolicited (asynchronous) reader transmissions. If buffer control is not
active, the reader transmits data to the host as soon as the data is acquired. The host
must acknowledge the data according to the ECP acknowledgment/negative
acknowledgment (ACK/NAK) protocol. Refer to command #6161 for more
information.

Reader response:
Done

7-31
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

6161 Enable Buffer Control Mode

Command #6161 is used to enable buffer control. Buffer control is an ECP option
that prevents asynchronous reader transmissions. When buffer control is enabled
using command #6161, the reader transmits only in response to command #06,
transmit buffer entry. The exception to this rule occurs on startup when the reader
transmits its two-line sign-on message asynchronously.
The following commands are used for buffer control:

Number Command Description Message

06 Transmit buffer entry Done, error, or <message>

535 Display buffer control status where BCM x

x= 0 for disabled
1 for enabled

6160 Disable buffer control mode (default) Done

6161 Enable buffer control mode Done

If BCM is enabled, the host must request tag IDs and reports from the reader using the
transmit buffer entry command 06. If the reader receives this command and it has data
in its buffer, it will transmit the buffered message of highest priority (tag IDs first and
then reports). If the reader’s buffer is empty, it will transmit the Done message instead.
The reader will return an Error message if it receives command #06 when BCM is not
enabled.
If buffer control is enabled, the reader will not support ECP ACK or NAK messages
from the host. Since all messages are transmitted in response to a host command,
acknowledgment from the host is not required. Instead, the ECP sequence numbers
are used to ensure data integrity. If the host receives an erroneous reader message, it
should retransmit command #06, transmit buffer entry, with the same sequence
number. This will cause the reader to search and replace its previous message.
If buffer control is enabled, the reader will not use the timeout to trigger re-
transmission of data because in buffer control, reader data is transmitted only when
requested by the host.
Reader response:
Done
Buffer Control Error Messages
The error messages shown in the following table are transmitted based on the content
level of the tag buffer. These messages are transmitted in data mode and command
mode. They will not be transmitted if uniqueness checking has been disabled to trans-
mit all IDs (command #40) or buffer all IDs (command #43).

7-32
 Commands

Error Message Buffer Status

Error02 Tag buffer is full. Incoming IDs cannot be buffered. An overflow

of the tag buffer can occur if Encompass 4 is left in command
mode or if flow control has disabled transmission. A buffer
overflow results in subsequent tag IDs being unreported.

Error03 Tag buffer has been partially cleared and new IDs are once
again being stored.

Error04 Tag buffer has filled to 75%.

Error05 Tag buffer has emptied to 50%.

If the buffer fills up and then transmission is re-enabled, the sequence of transmitted
reports would be as follows:
Error 04 75% full
Error 02 100% full
Error 03 emptied to less than 100%
Error 05 emptied to 50% or less

6170 Disable Echo Mode

Command #6170 disables the reader’s echo of received host commands. If operating
in basic protocol or data inquiry protocol, the reader echoes by default. As the reader
receives a host command, it echoes each character of the command. Once the entire
command has been received and processed, the reader transmits its response. If echo-
ing is disabled with command #6170, the reader does not echo the command, but
only transmits its response. The reader never echoes while in ECP or download mode
operation.
Reader response:
Done

6171 Enable Echo Mode (Factory Default)

Command #6171 enables the reader to echo received host commands. Command
#6170 disables echo mode.
Reader response:
Done

620N Set Output Control

Command #620N provides direct control of two output lines that may be used to
operate external hardware, such as gates or traffic lights. The value for N specifies the
output status requested as shown in Table 7-11. Receipt of any #620N command auto-
matically disables command #621 Predefined Output Control.

7-33
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table 7-11 Output Control Commands

Command Output Control Option

6200 Turn off both output ports

6201 Turn off output1, Turn on output0

6202 Turn off output0, Turn on output1

6203 Turn on both output ports (factory default)

Reader response:
Done

621 Select Predefined Output Control (Factory Default)

Command #621 configures the reader for predefined output mode. In this mode, both
output lines – output0 and output1 – are automatically asserted upon receipt of a valid
unique tag ID. The output line remains asserted for the time specified by output pulse
duration (#67N Set Output Pulse Duration). Any direct control command (#620N
Output Control) automatically disables the predefined output mode.
Reader response:
Done

63 Reset Reader
Command #63 resets the power fail bit, clears all buffers, resets tag uniqueness, turns
off both output lines, transmits the sign-on message, and returns to the data mode.
Note: This command does not reset any other configuration parameters.

Reader response:
Model E4 Series Ver X.XX SNYYYYYY
Copyright 2008 TransCore
where

X.XXD Version number

YYYYYY Serial number of the unit, skipping the fourth character printed on
the reader product label.

640N RF Control
Command #640N directly controls the RF module. The N value controls the RF
power as shown in Table 7-12.

7-34
 Commands

Table 7-12 RF Control Commands

Command RF Power

6400 Turns off RF

6401 Turns on RF

6402 Turns on continuous wave (CW) RF until

command 6400 or 641 is received by the
reader.

Command #6400 disables RF-by-input control command #641 Select RF-by-Input

Control.
Reader response:
Done

641 Select RF-by-Input Control (Factory Default)

Command #641 configures the reader for RF-by-input control. The reader automati-
cally turns on RF when it detects a presence through sense0. The reader turns off RF
according to the selected RF control algorithm (#692N Select RF Control Algorithm).
Reader response:
Done

642NN Select RF Operating Frequency

Caution
The authorized bands in the U.S. for CW frequency (i.e., ATA only) is 902.25 to
903.75 MHz and 910.00 to 921.50. The authorized frequency band for modulated
frequency is 911.75 to 921.75 MHz.

Note: RF frequency can be set for backward-compatibility using command #642NN

or for the newer 250-kHz step method using command #647XXX.

Command #642NN sets the reader RF frequency from 902 to 928 MHz in 500-kHz
steps, where NN is a hexadecimal value from 00 to 34. After the reader’s frequency is
set, the value is stored in battery-backed RAM (non-volatile RAM, NVRAM). This
value is NOT altered by power-down, loading default parameters, or a flash download
of new software (there is no default frequency value). It can only be changed by
issuing command #642NN.
Additionally, if the NVRAM becomes corrupted, the correct operating frequency
cannot be guaranteed. In this circumstance, the RF section will shut down and the
reader will send an error message to the host (Error 06). Until the frequency is reset
using command #642NN after NVRAM corruption, the unit will display the same

7-35
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

error message every time it is powered up or if an attempt is made to enable the RF

(by host or by external sensor).
The commands to set the RF frequency are listed in Table 7-13.

Table 7-13 RF Frequency Commands

Approved for Approved for

Command RF Frequency (MHz) Use in the U.S. Use in the U.S.
(ATA only) (modulated)

64200 902 No No

64201 902.5 Yes No

64202 903 Yes No

64203 903.5 Yes No

64204 904 No No

64205 904.5 No No

64206 905 No No

64207 905.5 No No

64208 906 No No

62409 906.5 No No

6420A 907 No No

6420B 907.5 No No

6420C 908 No No

6420D 908.5 No No

6420E 909 No No

6420F 909.5 No No

64210 910 Yes No

64211 910.5 Yes No

64212 911 Yes No

64213 911.5 Yes No

64214 912 Yes Yes

64215 912.5 Yes Yes

64216 913 Yes Yes

64217 913.5 Yes Yes

64218 914 Yes Yes

7-36
 Commands

Table 7-13 RF Frequency Commands (continued)

Approved for Approved for

Command RF Frequency (MHz) Use in the U.S. Use in the U.S.
(ATA only) (modulated)

64219 914.5 Yes Yes

6421A 915 (factory default) Yes Yes

6421B 915.5 Yes Yes

6421C 916 Yes Yes

6421D 916.5 Yes Yes

6421E 917 Yes Yes

6421F 917.5 Yes Yes

64220 918 Yes Yes

64221 918.5 Yes Yes

64222 919 Yes Yes

64223 919.5 Yes Yes

64224 920 Yes No

64225 920.5 Yes No

64226 921 Yes No

64227 921.5 Yes No

64228 922 No No

64229 922.5 No No

6422A 923 No No

6422B 923.5 No No

6422C 924 No No

6422D 924.5 No No

6422E 925 No No

6422F 925.5 No No

64230 926 No No

64231 926.5 No No

64232 927 No No

64233 927.5 No No

64234 928 No No

7-37
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Reader message:
Done

643NN Select ATA Operating Range (Distance)

Command #643NN selects the read range for ATA tags where NN is a hexadecimal
value from 00 to 1F; the range increases with increasing NN value. The range can be
adjusted for 32 discrete values where 00 is the shortest range and 1F is the longest
range. The default range value is 1F.
Reader response:
Done

644NN Set RF Attenuation

Command #644NN sets the attenuation control for the output RF power where NN is
a hexidecimal value from 00 to 0A. Settings for attenuation are 1.0 dB increments
over a range of 10 dB of attenuation from the maximum power setting of two watts at
0-dB attenuation to a minimum power level of 200 milliwatts at 10-dB attenuation.
The Set RF Attenuation command NN variables and corresponding attenuation set-
tings are shown in Table 7-14.

Table 7-14 RF Attenuation Command Variables

Attenuation
Variable (NN)
Setting (dB)

00 0 (factory default)

01 1

02 2

03 3

04 4

05 5

06 6

07 7

08 8

09 9

0A 10

Reader response:
Done

7-38
 Commands

645NN Set eGo and eGo Plus Operating Range (Distance)

Command #645NN sets the read range for eGo and eGo Plus Tags where NN is a
hexadecimal value from 00 to 1F; the range increases with increasing NN value. The
range can be adjusted for 32 discrete values where 00 is the shortest range and 1F is
the longest range. The default range value is 1F.
Reader response:
Done

646XX Set IAG RF Attenuation

Command #646XX sets the IAG attenuation control for the output RF power where
XX is a hexidecimal value from 00 to 0F. Setting 00 (0 dB) is the maximum power
setting and 0F (15 dB) is the minimum power setting. The default range value is 04.

647XXX Select RF Operating Frequency

Command #647XXX sets the reader RF from 860 to 930 MHz in 250-kHz steps,
where XXX is a hexadecimal value from 000 to 118. After the reader’s frequency is
set, the value is stored in non-volatile RAM (NVRAM). This value is not altered by
power-down.
If the NVRAM becomes corrupted, the correct operating frequency cannot be guaran-
teed. In this circumstance, the RF section shuts down and the reader sends an
Error06 message to the host. Until the frequency is reset using command #647XXX,
the unit displays the same error message every time it is powered up or if an attempt is
made to enable the RF by host or by external sensor.
The commands to set the RF frequency are presented in Table 7-15.

Table 7-15 Select RF Frequency Commands

Command RF Frequency (MHz)

647000 860.00

. .

. .

6470CF 911.75

6470D0 912.00

6470D1 912.25

6470D2 912.50

6470D3 912.75

6470D4 913.00

7-39
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table 7-15 Select RF Frequency Commands (continued)

Command RF Frequency (MHz)

. .

. .

. .

6470EA 918.50

6470EB 918.75

6470EC 919.00

6470ED 919.25

6470EE 919.50

6470EF 919.75

. .

. .

657113 928.75

647114 929.00

647115 929.25

647116 929.50

647117 929.75

647118 930.00

Reader response:
Done

65 Reset Power Fail Bit

Command #65 resets the power fail bit to 0. The bit changes from 0 to 1 when power
is restored to the reader. Upon reader power-up, the host transmits either command
#65 or #63 Reset Reader to properly initialize this bit. The current state of the power
fail bit may be displayed. Refer to “520 Display Power Fail Bit” on page 7-18 for
more information.
Reader response:
Done

7-40
 Commands

66F Load Default Operating Parameters

Command #66F loads all the factory default operating parameters except RF operat-
ing frequency. Refer to Table 8-2, Encompass 4 Reader Default Configuration Set-
tings” for a listing of the defaults.
Reader response:
Done All parameters loaded OK
Error A parameter load failed

67N Set Output Pulse Duration

Command #67N sets the output pulse duration for the command #621 Predefined
Output Control. This command specifies the length of time that output line(s) will be
asserted upon receipt of a valid and unique tag ID. The factory default setting is 228
ms. The variable N specifies an output pulse duration of 48 ms to 752 ms.
Uppercase or lowercase characters are allowed for N; for example, hex digits A
through F or a through f. The command numbers and corresponding output pulse
durations are shown in Table 7-16.

Table 7-16 Output Pulse Duration Commands

Command Duration

670 4

671 8

672 12

673 16

674 20

675 24

676 32

677 40

678 48

679 60

67A 76

67B 152

67C 228 (factory default)

67D 300

67E 376

67F 752

7-41
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Additional IDs may be acquired during the selected output pulse duration; however,
the timing restarts upon each successive ID acquisition. This command should be used
with discretion. For example, when the tag acquisition interval is short compared to
the selected pulse duration, distinct pulses may not be generated.
Reader response:
Done or Error

690N Select Presence Without Tag Report Option

Command #690N enables or disables the presence without tag report option. If the
presence without tag reporting option is enabled using command #6901, input
reports are transmitted when a tag presence is detected without the subsequent acqui-
sition of a valid tag. The value for N specifies the reports as shown in Table 7-17.

Table 7-17 Presence Without Tag Report Commands

Command Report Option

6900 Disable presence without tag reports (factory

default)

6901 Enable presence without tag reports

Reader response:
Done
Refer to “Basic Protocol and ECP Format” on page 6-5 for message format informa-
tion.

692N Select RF Control Algorithm

Command #692N selects the algorithm for turning off RF power when RF-by-input
control is enabled using command #641 Select RF-by-Input Control.
The values for N specify the RF control algorithms as shown in Table 7-18.

Table 7-18 RF Control Algorithm Commands

Command RF Power Off

6920 On timeout only

6921 Timeout or tag ID acquired

6922 Timeout or presence false (factory default)

Command #6920 turns off RF power based on the timeout established by command
#693N Set RF Timeout Period.
Command #6921 allows RF power to be turned off either after the timeout period or
upon acquisition of a valid tag ID, whichever occurs first.

7-42
 Commands

Command #6922 turns off RF power either after the timeout period or upon the pres-
ence false condition, whichever occurs first.
Reader response:
Done

693N Select RF Timeout Period

Command #693N selects the RF timeout period used by command #692N Select RF
Control Algorithm. Values for N range from 0 through F.
Command #693F disables the RF timeout. The reader turns off the RF immediately
following the acquisition of a valid tag, whether or not it is unique. This control algo-
rithm may be used in Wiegand mode to ensure that the tag data is transmitted once and
only once per presence on both serial and Wiegand ports.
Uppercase or lowercase characters are allowed for N; for example, hex digits A
through F or a through f. The commands and corresponding timeouts are shown in
Table 7-19.

Table 7-19 Timeout Period Values

Command Timeout (ms)

6930 0 (always expired)

6931 4

6932 8

6933 12

6934 20

6935 24

6936 32

6937 48

6938 60

6939 92

693A 152

693B 300

693C 452

693D 600

693E 752

693F Infinite (never expires, factory

default)

7-43
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Reader response:
Done or Error.
The reader returns an Error message if a valid hexadecimal digit is not substituted
for N in command #693N.

694N Select Input Inversion Option

Command #694N enables or disables input inversion. When inversion is enabled, an
open circuit input is interpreted as a closed circuit, and a closed circuit input is inter-
preted as an open circuit. This feature allows greater flexibility in the attachment of
external equipment to the reader inputs. For example, some proximity sensors indicate
presence with an open circuit. In this instance, command #6941 can enable input
inversion so that an open circuit input indicates a presence. The values for N represent
the two inversion options as shown in Table 7-20.

Table 7-20 Input Inversion Options

Command Option

6940 Disable input inversion (factory default)

6941 Enable input inversion

Reader response:
Done

695S...S Set Serial Number

Command #695 assigns the reader serial number according to the format:
695SSSSSS
where SSSSSS is the serial number.
The serial number may contain as many as six uppercase or lowercase ASCII alphanu-
meric characters.
Note: The factory-assigned serial number of the reader contains seven characters.
However, to maintain backward compatibility, the reader software allows only six
characters to be entered. When setting the serial number, skip the fourth (middle)
character of the seven-character number shown on the reader product label.

Note: Once assigned, the serial number is preserved during power-down and the
loading of default parameters.

Reader response:
Done

696S...S Store Hardware Configuration String

Command #696S...S stores hardware configuration information into reader mem-
ory.

7-44
 Commands

The hardware configuration string is assigned according to the following format:

696S...S
where S...S is the hardware configuration string that may contain as many as 20
uppercase or lowercase ASCII alphanumeric characters.
Note: Once assigned, configuration information is preserved during power-down and
the loading of default parameters.

Reader response:
Done

Auxiliary Reader Control — Command Group 8

Group 8 commands provide control of reader functions, such as the sense input lines.

82N Select Input Status Change Report Option

Command #82N selects the input lines to be monitored to report any change in input
status. The enabled input lines are monitored for any changes in the logic states. If a
change is detected, the reader generates an input status change message and treats it as
a tag ID. If the auxiliary information option is enabled, the input status field displays
the current input values. The value for N specifies the report options as shown in
Table 7-21.

Table 7-21 Input Status Change Report Options

Command Report Option

820 Disable status change reports (factory default)

821 Report change on input0

822 Report change on input1

823 Report changes on input0 and input1

Reader response:
Done

830 Disable Automatic Periodic RF Status Report (Factory

Default)
Command #830 is a default set in the factory to disable the automatic periodic RF
status report.
Reader response:
Done

7-45
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

831 Enable Automatic Periodic RF Status Report

Command #831 enables the automatic periodic RF status report. This function sends
out a periodic RF status report if no other message (a tag read) is sent from the reader
for a period of time. This message is the same message that would be sent in response
to the #527 Display RF Status command. Enabling this function is helpful in some
sites where there may not be much tag activity, and the user wants an automatic way to
ensure the communication channel with the reader is still intact. With this function
enabled, the host system will get a message from the reader at least every three min-
utes.
Reader response:
Done

7-46
 8
Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader
 Chapter 8
Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader

This chapter provides instructions for configuring the Encompass®

4 Reader, including factory configuration parameter defaults and
instructions for using terminal emulation software to check and change
the Encompass 4 Reader factory configuration defaults.

Configuring the Reader

After installing the Encompass 4 Reader, you need to configure its operating parame-
ters. Terminal settings should be initially set at 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop
bit, and no flow control.

General Configuration Labeling

Each Encompass 4 Reader and its shipping carton are labeled to indicate the unit’s
general configuration. Table 8-1 contains explanations of the Encompass 4 Reader
label fields.

Table 8-1 Encompass 4 Reader Configuration Label Fields

Field Description

1st TransCore reader designator

2nd Model number

40 = 915 MHz frequency band

3rd Interface
xy
where
x = 0 (integrated antenna); x = 1 (external antenna)
y = 2 (RS–232 and Wiegand); y = 4 (RS–422 and Wiegand)

4th 0nn
where
nn = tag protocol(s). Protocol designators are as follows:
001 = Super eGo® (SeGo) protocol
002 = ATA/SeGo protocols
003 = eGo/SeGo protocols
004 = SeGo/Inter-Agency Group (IAG) protocols
008 = ATA protocol
009 = eGo/ATA protocols
010 = ATA/IAG protocols
019 = IAG protocol

As an example, a label reading 10-4002-004 indicates that this 915-MHz Encompass 4

Reader is configured with an integrated antenna, RS–232 and Wiegand communica-
tions, and reads SeGo and IAG protocol tags.

8-3
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Default Operating Parameter Settings

Table 8-2 contains the factory default configuration settings for the Encompass 4
Reader operating parameters.The default configuration settings may not be the correct
operating configuration settings for a specific site. Changes to the configuration set-
tings may have to be made, depending on the site plan, as described in Chapter 2
“Developing the Site Plan.”
Review the default configurations shown in Table 8-2 to determine which parameters,
in addition to operating frequency and operating range, need to be adjusted. Refer to
Chapter 7, “Commands,” for a complete list of parameters and the corresponding
commands.
Note: The dual-protocol Encompass 4 Reader internal timing varies depending on
the operative tag read mode and the type of tag in the read field.

Table 8-2 Encompass 4 Reader Default Configuration Settings

Parameter Setting Command

Operating mode Data 00

Baud rate 9600 1005

Stop bits 1 1010

Parity None 1020

Time and data appended Enabled 302

Auxiliary information appended Disabled 310

Unique ID code criteria Separation of 1 ID 4100

Wiegand mode Disabled 450

Tag translation mode Disabled 452

Multi-tag sort Disabled 454

eGo and eGo Plus tag Enabled 456

initialization during multi-tag sort

Second alternative group select Disabled 458

Wiegand transmit mode 1 second 4601

Third alternative group select Disabled 490

Fourth alternative group select Disabled 492

Fifth alternative group select Disabled 494

Alternate group select Disabled 496

Reader ID number 00 6000

8-4
 Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader

Table 8-2 Encompass 4 Reader Default Configuration Settings (continued)

Parameter Setting Command

Communications protocol Basic 610

Error correcting protocol (ECP) 12.7 sec 612FE

timeout

Flow control Software (XON/XOFF) 6141

Echo mode Enabled 6171

Sense output control Predefined 621

RF-by-input control Enabled 641

ATA operating range Maximum 6431F

RF attenuation Full power 64400

eGo and eGo Plus Tag operating Maximum 6451F

range

Sense output pulse duration 228 ms 67C

Presence without tag reports Disabled 6900

RF-off control Timeout or no presence 6922

RF timeout Never true 693F

Input inversion Disabled 6940

Serial number NNNNNN 695

Store hardware configuration Hardware configuration not 696

known

Input status change reports Disabled 820

Automatic periodic RF status Disabled 830

report

a. Local laws apply. The authorized frequency band for the TransCore Encompass 4
Reader in the United States is 911.75 MHz to 919.75 MHz. Contact TransCore if your
application requires a frequency outside of this range.

Configuring Parameters with Terminal Emulation Software

To configure the Encompass 4 Reader using a PC and terminal emulation software to
manually enter Encompass 4 Reader host commands, follow the instructions in the
section “Connecting the Encompass 4 Reader to the PC” on page 4-23. Then, enter the
appropriate configuration commands through the terminal emulation software on your
PC.

8-5
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

See Chapter 7, “Commands,” for a detailed description of all available configuration

commands.

Starting the Terminal Emulation Software

You can use a PC and any terminal emulation software to enter the host commands to
download flash software, configure reader operating parameters, perform diagnostics,
and retrieve tag data. The following procedures show examples using Hyper Termi-
nal™, an application included with Microsoft Windows. Most terminal emulation
applications have a similar sequence for launching.

To start the terminal emulation software

1. At the command prompt, type your terminal emulation start command; or if
using Windows Hyper Terminal, select:
Programs>Accessories>Hyperterm
and press ENTER.
The application displays the Connection Description dialog box as shown in
Figure 8-1.

Figure 8-1 Connection Description Dialog Box

2. Enter a name for the session and click OK.
The application displays the Phone Number dialog box as shown in Figure 8-2.

8-6
 Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader

Figure 8-2 Phone Number Dialog Box

3. From the Connect using pull-down list, choose the Com 1 option (or whichever
com port on the PC to which the RS-232 cable is attached) and click OK.
The application displays the COM1 Properties dialog box as shown in
Figure 8-3.

Figure 8-3 COM 1 Properties Dialog Box

4. In the pull-down lists on the COM1 Properties dialog box, choose the following
values:

• Bits per second: 9600 baud

• Data bits: 8
8-7
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

• Parity: None

• Stop bits: 1

• Flow control: None

Click OK.
The application displays the configparms - Hyper Terminal main screen as
shown in Figure 8-4.

Figure 8-4 Hyper Terminal Main Screen

Verifying Communications
You must verify that the Encompass 4 Reader and the PC or laptop are communicat-
ing.

To verify communications
1. Start the terminal emulation application as described previously in “Starting the
Terminal Emulation Software” on page 8-6.
Note: When testing the Encompass 4 Reader using a laptop, TransCore recommends
that you configure laptop communication parameters to match those of the host com-
puter to which the Encompass 4 Reader will be connected after testing and configura-
tion are completed.

2. Cycle the power on the Encompass 4 Reader.

8-8
 Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader

Upon startup, the Encompass 4 Reader transmits a sign-on message, displayed on

the terminal emulation screen as shown in Figure 8-5, or a boot ROM failure
message.

Figure 8-5 Sign-on Message

The sign-on message appears as follows:
Model [software version] SNYYYYYY
[Copyright notice]
where YYYYYY is the serial number assigned to the Encompass 4 Reader skipping
the fourth character printed on the reader product label.
Serial number 000000 is the default setting and is not a valid number. If this
number appears in the sign-on message, the serial number has never been stored
into reader memory. Contact TransCore Technical Support.
If the flash memory checksum is not verifiable, the sign-on message appears as
follows:
Model [E4 BOOT] Ver 0.00 A
[Copyright notice]
If the failure message version number equals 0.00 E and no serial number exists,
the flash memory checksum has failed, and the Encompass 4 Reader is operating
out of boot ROM. In this case, the Encompass 4 Reader automatically enters
download mode and waits for a new program to be loaded into the flash memory.
Follow the instructions in “Program Download” on page 5-5.
Communications can also be verified by using the command sequence in
Table 8-3.

8-9
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table 8-3 Command Sequence to Verify Communications

Encompass 4 Reader
Entry Notes
Response

#01 <CR> #Done <CR/LF> Switches the Encompass 4 Reader

to command mode.
#505 <CR> #Model E4 Series Ver X.XX Reports the software version and
SN97001P <CR/LF> serial number.
#00 <CR> #Done <CR/LF> Returns the Encompass 4 Reader to
data mode.

3. If a successful sign-on message is not returned, check connections and

communications factors and correct any errors.

To check connections and communications factors

1. Confirm that the Encompass 4 Reader has power.
2. Verify the connections between the PC and the Encompass 4 Reader.
3. Verify the receive (Rx) and transmit (Tx) connections.
4. If using handshaking, verify the RTS and CTS connections.
5. Verify the COM port settings for the Encompass 4 Reader using the instructions
in “Serial Port Communications” on page 8-18.
Repeat the procedures in “Verifying Communications” on page 8-8.
If you still cannot verify the Encompass 4 Reader and PC communications, use the
information in “Technical Support” on page 9-6 to contact TransCore.

Verifying Tag Read Capability

After verifying communications between the Encompass 4 Reader and the PC, verify
the capability to read tags.
Note: The default tag read mode of the reader is the protocol(s) programmed into the
reader. Table 8-1 shows how to determine which tag protocol(s) your Encompass 4
reader supports. Use only those test tags programmed with the correct protocol(s) for
the reader.

Caution
To avoid damage to the Encompass 4 Reader using an external antenna, you must
connect the antenna before applying power to the reader.

To verify tag read capability

1. Once communications are verified as described in “Verifying Communications”
on page 8-8, enter the following sequence of commands to turn on continuous
RF:
• #01
• #6401

8-10
 Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader

• #40
• #00
2. Pass one test tag in front of the unit. If the Encompass 4 Reader reads the tag, the
terminal emulation application displays the tag information on the screen as
shown in Figure 8-6.

Successful
Tag Read

Figure 8-6 Successful Tag Read

If the tag ID is not displayed, perform the following actions:

• Verify that the Encompass 4 Reader is in data mode (command

#00 Switch to Data Mode).

• Ensure that the tag you are using is compatible with the
Encompass 4 Reader. The Encompass 4 Reader can read tag
types that are compatible with the reader model.

• An Encompass 4 Reader displays the tag read for any tag that is
compatible with the reader programming. Table 8-1 shows how to
determine which tag protocol(s) your Encompass 4 reader
supports.

• Using the audible circuit tester as described in “Testing the

Encompass 4 Reader Using an Audible Circuit Tester” on page 4-
5, verify that the reader is capable of reading the tag in the read
zone. If it is, the problem is probably in the communications
between the Encompass 4 Reader and the host.

3. Pass a different reader-compatible test tag in front of your Encompass 4 Reader.

4. When the Encompass 4 Reader reads the second tag successfully, the terminal
emulation application displays that tag’s information in the main screen below
the information for the first tag, as shown in Figure 8-7.

8-11
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Figure 8-7 Second Successful Tag Read

If the read is unsuccessful, perform the following actions:

• Ensure the tag you are using is compatible with the Encompass 4
Reader.

• Using the audible circuit tester as described in “Testing the

Encompass 4 Reader Using an Audible Circuit Tester” on page 4-
5, verify that the reader is capable of reading the tag in the read
zone. If it is, the problem is probably in the communications
between the Encompass 4 Reader and the host computer.

Configuring Encompass 4 Parameters

Follow the procedures in this section to configure Encompass 4 parameters using a
PC, laptop, or terminal emulator. The PC or laptop must be connected to and commu-
nicating with the Encompass 4 Reader, and the terminal emulation application must be
configured correctly, as described in the section “Verifying Communications” on page
8-8.
Note: If you are using Wiegand mode, you must connect the PC or laptop to the
Encompass 4 Reader using the RS–232 or RS–422 interface before attempting to send
commands to the reader. You can leave the Wiegand interface connected during this
procedure.

To configure parameters
1. Switch to command mode by typing #01 at the prompt on the terminal
emulation screen, and pressing ENTER.
Note: All Encompass 4 Reader commands are preceded by the start-of-message char-
acter (#).

2. To meet requirements of your site, make changes to default operating parameters

as described in the following sections.
The following sections contain procedures to set some of the parameters that are
commonly changed to meet the requirements of a specific site. Procedures are
listed in alphabetical order by parameter.

8-12
 Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader

Appended Tag Data

Use this procedure to set appended tag data parameters using the terminal emulation
application. See “31N Append Auxiliary Information Selection” on page 7-9 for more
information.

To set appended tag data parameters

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.
2. Enter command #311 to append auxiliary information or command #310 to
have no auxiliary information appended (factory default). Press ENTER.

ID Separation
The host can select a unique ID separation of one ID or two IDs. The reader default
operation is for a unique ID separation of one ID and a uniqueness timeout of
two minutes. You can disable the uniqueness check using command #40 Transmit All
ID Codes. In this case, every tag ID received is transmitted without regard to unique-
ness. You can reinstate uniqueness checking with commands #4100 or #4101 Select
ID Separation.
Note: The dual-protocol Encompass 4 Reader internal timing varies depending on
the operative tag read mode and the type of tag in the read field.

See section “40 Transmit All ID Codes” on page 7-10 and section “410N Select
Unique ID Code Criteria (Anti-passback Feature)” on page 7-11.
To set ID separation parameters
1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.
2. Enter command #4100 to select a separation of one ID; enter command #4101
to select a separation of two IDs. Press ENTER.

Reports
The Encompass 4 Reader can be configured to transmit presence without tag reports
and input status change reports. A presence without tag report is transmitted in data
mode only, and only if the system has a presence detector. This report is sent if a pres-
ence is detected without the detection of a valid tag ID. See sections “529 Display
Presence Input Status” on page 7-24 and “690N Select Presence Without Tag Report
Option” on page 7-42.
If configured with command #82N Select Input Status Change Report Option to
transmit input status change reports, the reader will transmit a message to the host
computer any time the inputs change state. Input status change reports are transmitted
in data mode only. Input status change reporting is disabled by default. See sections
“560 Request Sensor Status Change” on page 7-28 and “82N Select Input Status
Change Report Option” on page 7-45. Also refer to Chapter 6, ”Communications Pro-
tocols” for information on message formats.

8-13
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

To set presence reporting

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.
2. Enter command #529 to display presence input status and press ENTER. P0
indicates presence without tag reports disabled (factory default), and P1 indicates
presence without tag reports enabled.
3. Enter command #6901 to enable presence without tag reports, or enter
command #6900 to disable presence without tag reports (factory default). Press
ENTER.

To set input status change reporting

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.
2. Enter command #560 to display input status change report options and press
ENTER.
• EO = input status change reports disabled (factory default)
• E1 = input status change reports enabled
• M0 = reporting disabled (factory default)
• M1 = changes on input0 reported
• M2 = changes on input1 reported
• M3 = changes on either input reported
3. Enter command #821 to report any change on input0, command #822 to report
any change on input 1, command #823 to report changes on input0 and input1,
or command #820 to disable status change reports (factory default). Press
ENTER.

Reset Reader
Command #63 Reset Reader resets uniqueness, clears the power fail bit, and trans-
mits the sign-on message. The reader returns to data mode following the completion
of this command.
Note: This command does not reset any of the configuration parameters.

See “63 Reset Reader” on page 7-34.

To reset the reader

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.
2. Enter command #63. Press ENTER.
The terminal emulation screen displays the sign-on message as shown in Figure
8-5 on page 8-9.

8-14
 Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader

Radio Frequency
Caution
The authorized continuous wave (CW) frequency band for the Encompass 4 Reader
in the U.S. is 902.25 to 903.75 MHz and 910.00 to 921.50 MHz. The authorized
modulated frequency band for the Encompass 4 Reader in the U.S. is 911.75 to
919.75 MHz. The RF for each Encompass 4 Reader at the site must be set according
to the frequency specified in the FCC site license. Only trained, authorized installa-
tion and maintenance personnel are permitted by FCC to set the RF.
By using the Encompass 4 Reader an authorized person can set the frequency within
the range from 902 to 928 MHz in 0.25 MHz steps. You can set the frequency by
using a terminal emulation program and issuing the frequency command, as discussed
in section “647XXX Select RF Operating Frequency” on page 7-39.
Note: For backward compatibility to existing controllers, you can set the RF operat-
ing frequency in 500-kHz steps using command #642NN.

To set the frequency range

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.
2. Enter command #647XXX – where XXX is a hexadecimal value from 000 to 118
– and press ENTER. See command “647XXX Select RF Operating Frequency”
on page 7-39 for a complete listing of the hexadecimal values and the
corresponding frequencies. For backward compatible frequency selection, see
command “642NN Select RF Operating Frequency” on page 7-35.
3. To verify that the RF has been changed to the proper setting, type in command
#527 to see the current frequency setting.

Caution
Contact TransCore if your application requires a frequency outside of the autho-
rized frequency range.

RF Transmission
The RF transmission can be controlled by one of the following methods:
• Connecting a vehicle detector to the sense input0 circuit

• The host sending software commands to the Encompass 4 Reader

As a factory default, the Encompass 4 Reader is configured to control the RF power
with a vehicle detector.
Figure 8-8 illustrates the methods of controlling RF sense output.

8-15
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Figure 8-8 Encompass 4 Reader RF Control Options

Vehicle Detector Controlling RF Transmission

The vehicle detector can be a loop detector, an infrared sensor, or an ultrasonic detec-
tor that is connected to sense input0 to turn on the Encompass 4 Reader RF transmit-
ter. In Figure 8-8, Option A shows a vehicle detector controlling the RF transmitter.
This operation is preferred because the RF transmits only when a vehicle is in the
Encompass 4 Reader read zone. Command #641 Select RF-by-Input Control (factory
default) must be enabled.

To set the option of the vehicle detector controlling the Encompass 4

Reader
1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.
2. Enter command #641. Press ENTER.
Leave the setting on RF-by-input control for normal operation.

Host Controlling RF Transmission

In Figure 8-8, Option B shows the host controlling the RF transmitter.
If the vehicle detector is connected to the host computer, as shown in Option B, com-
mands #6400 RF Off and #6401 RF On sent from the host computer turn on and off
the Encompass 4 Reader RF transmitter.

Continuous RF Transmission
In Figure 8-8, Option C shows the test configuration controlling the RF transmitter. To
test the Encompass 4 Reader, as described in “Testing the Encompass 4 Reader Using
an Audible Circuit Tester” on page 4-5, you can turn on the Encompass 4 Reader RF
transmitter continuously by issuing command #6401.

8-16
 Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader

You may also use command #6402 to turn on CW RF for diagnostic purposes. Enter-
ing this command transmits a continuous RF signal at the output frequency and atten-
uation level as specified in the respective associated commands until command
#6400 RF Off, #6401 RF On, or #641 Select RF-by-Input Control is received by
the reader. Tags are not read in CW mode. See “640N RF Control” on page 7-34 for
more information.

Sense Inputs
Both the RS–232 and RS–422 configurations used by the Encompass 4 Reader have
two sense inputs — sense input0 and sense input1. The default configuration uses
sense input0 as the presence detection device line. RF power is automatically turned
on only when the presence detection device (loop detector or other device) detects a
presence. Sense input1 is not used directly by the reader; it is used by the host com-
puter to monitor an external device. The Encompass 4 Reader sense inputs are
designed to connect to a dry contact closure.
You can configure the Encompass 4 Reader to generate input status change reports,
which are transmitted like tag IDs. The host can then respond based on the true/false
(closed/open) status of the sense inputs. See the section “Reports” on page 8-13.
The following procedures describe how to set sense inputs using the terminal emula-
tion software. See commands “526 Display I/O Status” on page 7-21, “694N Select
Input Inversion Option” on page 7-44, and “82N Select Input Status Change Report
Option” on page 7-45 for more information.
To set sense inputs
1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.
2. Enter command #526 to display the current input/output status. C0 = host
controls outputs; C1= predefined output mode; O0 = both outputs off; O1 =
output0 on; O2 = output1 on; O3 = both outputs on; I0 = both inputs false; I1 =
input0 true; I2 = input1 true.
3. Enter command #6940 to disable input inversion (factory default) or command
#6941 to enable input inversion, and press ENTER.

Sense Output Devices

Both the RS–232 and RS–422 configurations used by the Encompass 4 Reader have
two sense output circuits – sense output0 and sense output1.
By default, the Encompass 4 Reader operates in predefined output mode where sense
output0 and sense output1 are asserted every time a unique valid tag is read. Both
sense output devices are asserted by issuing command #621 Predefined Output Con-
trol. The devices are not asserted when tags are acquired in the transmit all or buffer
all ID mode or when the Encompass 4 Reader is operating in Wiegand mode. The
sense output pulse duration is variable (command #67N).
The host computer can disable the predefined sense output control by issuing com-
mand #6201 to turn sense output0 on or by issuing any of the following commands:
#6200 Turn Off Both Output Ports, #6201 Turn Off Output0, On Output1, #6202
8-17
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Turn Off Output1, On Output0, or #6203 Turn On Both Output Ports. While under
host control, the sense outputs are not automatically asserted when a valid tag is read.
The host must issue command #621 Predefined Output Mode to return to the pre-
defined mode.

Serial Port Communications

The Encompass 4 Reader supports one communications port, which can be ordered as
either RS–232/Wiegand or RS–422/Wiegand. For the RS–232 and RS–422 communi-
cations specifications, the Encompass 4 Reader maintains the following three sets of
parameters that affect serial port communications:
• Port configuration parameters (baud rate, data bits, stop bits, parity)
• Communications protocols (basic, error correcting)

• Flow control scheme (none, software, hardware)

The default serial port configuration for each of these three parameters is as follows:
• 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity

• Basic communications protocol

• Software flow control (XON/XOFF)

You can change these parameters in data mode and command mode operation by issu-
ing commands with the host computer. Use the following procedures to set serial port
communications parameters using the terminal emulation program.

Port Configuration Parameters

Use this procedure to set port configuration parameters using the terminal emulation
program. Consult sections “100N Select Baud Rate" through “102N Select Parity” on
page 7-7.

To set baud rate

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.
2. Enter command #100N and press ENTER.

To set stop bits

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.
2. Enter command #101N and press ENTER.

To set parity
1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.
2. Enter command #102N and press ENTER.

8-18
 Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader

Communications Protocol
Use the following procedures to set communications protocol. Consult sections “610
Select Basic Communication Protocol (Factory Default)" through “612NN Select
Error Correcting Protocol Timeout” on page 7-30 for more information.

Caution
Do not switch to ECP (command #611) unless the host is prepared to acknowledge
each reader transmission.

To select a communications protocol

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.
2. Enter command #610 to select basic protocol (factory default) or command
#611 to select ECP and press ENTER.

Software Flow Control

Two modes of flow control are supported — software (XON/XOFF) and hardware
(CTS - clear to send). The host can enable or disable flow control with command
#614N Select Flow Control Option.
The host can use software control characters (XON/XOFF) or the hardware CTS
handshake line to interrupt reader transmissions. When the reader is configured for
software flow control, it stops transmitting if it receives the XOFF character from the
host (host software command 13H). It resumes transmitting only when it receives the
XON character (host software command 11H) from the host. Likewise, when the
reader is configured for hardware flow control, it stops transmitting if it detects that
the CTS line is no longer asserted. It resumes transmitting when this line is asserted. If
flow control is not needed, the reader should be configured for no flow control
(#6140 Disable Flow Control).
Note: TransCore recommends that XON/XOFF flow control be disabled while using
the error correcting protocol.

Use the following procedure to set flow control parameters using the terminal emula-
tion program. See section “614N Select Flow Control Option” on page 7-31.

To select flow control

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.
2. Enter command #6140 to disable flow control, command #6141 to enable
software flow control (factory default), or command #6142 to enable hardware
flow control and press ENTER.

Fine-Tuning and Verifying the Read Zone

If the read zone is too wide or too deep for your application, it can be fine-tuned by
physically adjusting the Encompass 4 Reader or external antenna mounting orienta-
tion, reprogramming the actual RF power output (#644NN Set RF Attenuation), and/

8-19
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

or reprogramming the RF sensitivity range (#643NN Set ATA Operating Range and
#645NN Set eGo and eGo Plus Operating Range). The combination of these adjust-
ments allows you to confine the read zone to the area where tagged vehicles pass. This
operation also minimizes reading unwanted vehicles in adjacent lanes or parking
areas.
See sections “643NN Select ATA Operating Range (Distance)” on page 7-38, “645NN
Set eGo and eGo Plus Operating Range (Distance)” on page 7-39, and “644NN Set RF
Attenuation” on page 7-38 for more information.
Note: As described in “Marking the Read Zone” on page 4-29, marking the read pat-
tern using test tags that are not mounted to vehicles give a general idea of the read
pattern but the pattern will vary somewhat when actual vehicles with tags are tested.
Final adjustments must be made with tags properly mounted on a variety of vehicles.

Physically Orienting the Encompass 4 Reader

You can manually adjust the location of the read zone by loosening the Encompass 4
Reader mounting brackets and pointing the reader in the desired direction. The unit
should be aligned to point directly at the tag as it enters the desired read zone.

Physically Orienting the Encompass 4 Reader Antenna

You can manually adjust the location of the read zone by loosening the antenna
mounting brackets and pointing the antenna in the desired direction. The unit should
be aligned to point directly at the tag as it enters the desired read zone.

Fine-Tuning the Read Zone by Lowering Output Power

You can make the read zone smaller by adjusting the Encompass 4 Reader RF power
output from a maximum of 2 watts to a minimum of 200 milliwatts using command
#644NN Set RF Attenuation. Lowering the RF power has the added benefit of reduc-
ing RF interference with adjacent lanes.
To adjust the read zone by lowering output power
1. Ensure that your PC is communicating with the Encompass 4 Reader using a
terminal emulation program as described in section “Verifying Communications”
on page 8-8.
2. Mark the current read zone as described in section “Marking the Read Zone” on
page 4-29.

Caution
Test tags should be compatible with your Encompass 4 Reader. Test tags can be
ATA-protocol, ISO-compliant, or Inter-Agency Group tags affixed to a plastic or
wooden yardstick, or eGo or eGo Plus sticker-type tags affixed to a piece of nonme-
tallic windshield-type glass 0.190 to 0.230 in (4.82 to 5.84 mm) in thickness. The
sticker-type tags have a reduced read range when not attached to glass.
3. Enter command #01 to switch to command mode. You are prompted with
#DONE from the reader and can now enter reader commands.
4. Enter in command #64401 to lower the RF power by 1 dB below 2 watts
(default). Press ENTER.

8-20
 Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader

Note: In the command #644NN, NN can be any hexadecimal value from 00 to

0A. Settings for attenuation are 1.0 dB increments over a range of 10 dB of atten-
uation from the maximum power setting of 2 watts at 0 dB attenuation to a mini-
mum power level of 200 milliwatts at 10 dB attenuation. Increasing the
attenuation lowers the output RF power.
5. Switch to data mode by entering command #00 and pressing ENTER.
6. Verify that the read zone has decreased by moving the tag through the desired
read area. If the read zone is still too large, switch to command mode and enter
the command #64402 to lower the output RF power another 1 dB. Continue
increasing the NN value until the read zone matches the desired read zone.
7. Follow the steps in “Procedures” on page 4-30 to mark the new read zone on the
ground with tape or chalk.
When the desired read zone is established, test the read zone with simulated and
real traffic by performing the following procedures:

To test the read zone

1. Ensure that the Encompass 4 Reader is in data mode.
2. With the Encompass 4 Reader running, place one tag behind your back while you
hold another tag in the new read zone. If a valid read, the data from the tag held in
the read zone displays on the PC screen.
3. Switch tags, placing the other tag behind your back and holding the first tag in
the read zone. If a valid read, the data from this tag held in the read zone displays
on the PC screen. If both tags are read, you have successfully adjusted the read
range.
4. If one or both tags did not read, follow the suggestions in “Verifying Tag Read
Capability” on page 8-10.
5. As a last test, attach test tags to vehicles and simulate traffic going through the
read zone to verify that the system performs accurately in a live environment.

Fine-tuning the Read Zone by Adjusting Sensitivity Range

The Encompass 4 Reader read zone can be fine-tuned by using command #643NN
for ATA tag read mode or #645NN for eGo and eGo Plus tag read mode to reprogram
the RF sensitivity range. Sensitivity range adjustments have less impact on the read
pattern than RF power adjustment, thus RF power adjustment should be used as the
main read pattern adjustment tool. Sensitivity range control may be helpful in stop-
ping some tag reads on the very edges of the read pattern. To produce a noticeable
change in the read pattern, you must decrease the range sensitivity by more than one
increment.

To adjust the read zone by adjusting sensitivity range

1. Ensure that your PC is communicating with the Encompass 4 Reader using a
terminal emulation program as described in “Verifying Communications” on
page 8-8.
2. Mark the current read zone as described in “Marking the Read Zone” on page 4-
29.

8-21
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

3. Enter command #01 to switch to command mode. You are prompted with
#DONE from the reader and can now enter reader commands.
4. Enter command #64318 or #64518 to decrease the range sensitivity seven
increments below the maximum (default). Press ENTER.
Note: In the command #643NN or #645NN, NN can be any hexadecimal
value from 00 to 1F. The reader’s receiver becomes less sensitive to tag signals as
the value of NN is lowered from the maximum sensitivity of 1F to the minimum
sensitivity of 00.
5. Verify that the read zone has decreased by moving the tag through the desired
read area. If the read zone is still too large, switch to command mode and enter
the command #64317 or #64517 to decrease the range another increment.
Continue increasing the NN value until the read zone matches the desired read
zone.
6. Follow the steps in section “Procedures” on page 4-30 to mark the new read zone
on the ground with the tape or chalk.
When the desired read zone is established, test the read zone with simulated and
real traffic by performing the following procedures.

To test the read zone

1. Ensure that the Encompass 4 Reader is in data mode.
2. With the Encompass 4 Reader running, place one tag behind your back while you
hold another tag in the new read zone. If a valid read, the data from the tag held in
the read zone displays on the PC screen.
3. Switch tags, placing the other tag behind your back and holding the first tag in
the read zone. If a valid read, the data from this tag held in the read zone displays
on the PC screen.
4. If both tags are read, you have successfully adjusted the read range. If one or both
tags did not read, follow the suggestions in “Verifying Tag Read Capability” on
page 8-10.
5. As a last test, attach test tags to vehicles and simulate traffic going through the
read zone to verify that the system performs accurately in a live environment.

8-22
 9
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
 Chapter 9
Troubleshooting and Maintenance

This chapter contains information for troubleshooting an Encompass® 4

Reader and performing minimal maintenance checks. It also includes
information for returning products for repair, obtaining support, and
contact information for providing feedback and suggestions to
TransCore.

Error Messages
The Encompass 4 Reader transmits an error message if a command received from the
host is not a recognized command or if information supplied with the command is not
correct. The reader sends this message to diagnostic commands if the reader fails the
specified test.
Table 9-1 contains a list of error messages.

Table 9-1 Error Messages

Error Description Corrective Action

Message

Error06 NVRAM parameters have been lost. The Reset the frequency using command
Encompass 4 Reader will not function #647XXX.
properly because the RF section is shut off
until the frequency is reset.

Error07 The RF phase locked loop (PLL) has lost Reset the RF frequency. Refer to “Radio
lock and is unable to operate at its Frequency” on page 8-15 for instructions.
intended frequency. RF output is disabled
while the Encompass 4 Reader attempts to
reset the PLL.

Error08 The RF PLL has successfully regained No action necessary; the previous error
lock and has been reset to its proper has been corrected.
operating frequency. The RF section is
returned to its state prior to losing lock
(enabled/disabled). Error08 will only be
issued after Error07 has been issued.

Error11 The operator is attempting to use an Enable eATA mode using command #489
Intellitag-based tag in Wiegand mode while if Wiegand operation is needed and the
the Encompass 4 Reader is in ID-only tags are programmed with Wiegand data.
mode, thus Wiegand compatibility issues.

9-3
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table 9-1 Error Messages (continued)

Error
Description Corrective Action
Message

ErrorRF1 Warning message that the RF board did If the reader indicates a single ErrorRF1
not return an update acknowledge signal event and recovers from the error, no
corrective action is required. You may want
to track this error message if it should
occur again. If the reader indicates
repeated ErrorRF1 warning messages
then return the reader to the factory.

ErrorRF2 Warning message that the RF module did If the reader indicates a single ErrorRF2
not return an INIT DONE signal event and recovers from the error, no
corrective action is required. You may want
to track this error message if it should
occur again. If the reader indicates
repeated ErrorRF2 warning messages
then return the reader to the factory.

ErrorRF3 Warning message of unexpected status If the reader indicates a single ErrorRF3
read, including status byte, from RF event and recovers from the error, no
module corrective action is required. You may want
to track this error message if it should
occur again. If the reader indicates
repeated ErrorRF3 warning messages
then return the reader to the factory.

Troubleshooting
You can use the following table for troubleshooting. Should problems continue, con-
tact TransCore for return and replacement procedures. If you contact Technical Sup-
port, use the symptom number in Table 9-2 to reference the problem that you are
having with the Encompass 4 Reader.

Table 9-2 Symptoms and Remedies

Symptom Symptom Remedy

Numbera

1 When performing a quick Check all your wiring connections and antenna connections (if
test of the Encompass 4 using external antenna), and ensure that your buzz box is
Reader, the buzz box does functioning.
not buzz.
The wires from the Encompass 4 Reader are grouped in pairs.
You could find more than one red wire, more than one black
wire, and so on. You must connect the correct red and white
wire pair to the leads from the battery.
Verify that RF is on as described in “Bench Testing the
Encompass 4 Reader Before Installation” on page 4-10. Using
a terminal emulation program, you may switch to command
mode and issue command #527 to determine RF status. See
page 7-23 for more information.

9-4
 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Table 9-2 Symptoms and Remedies (continued)

Symptom
Symptom Remedy
Numbera

2 The baud rate is selected The Encompass 4 Reader is not communicating with your PC.
correctly but nothing Check the power supply to your PC, and check the
happens. connections between the PC and the Encompass 4 Reader.
Try reversing the receive and transmit connections.

3 When testing the The Encompass 4 Reader may not have the software loaded
Encompass 4 Reader, all the inside the unit. Contact Technical Support as described on
wires are connected page 9-6.
correctly but the unit does
not respond. If you are using a terminal emulation program, check that the
terminal emulation setting on the Encompass 4 Reader is
VT100.
Check that the Encompass 4 communication cable is
connected to the correct COM port.
Verify that the external antenna is connected correctly.

4 Strange signal responses Ensure that the reader is in the correct interface mode for the
come from the Encompass 4 test tag, i.e., Wiegand mode for a Wiegand tag.
Reader when tested with the
PC. Check the system defaults using a terminal emulation
program. Both PC and reader should be set to 9600 baud, 8
bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity.

5 When a tag is moved in front The Encompass 4 Reader works. The sound is the relay
of the reader or external inside the Encompass 4 Reader that is controlled by a lock
antenna, a clicking sound signal. The relay is actuated when a tag is in the read zone.
comes from the Encompass
4 Reader.

6 Nothing happens when the Ensure that the Encompass 4 Reader is powered on and is in
test tag is passed in front of predefined output mode. (#621)
the Encompass 4 Reader or
external antenna. Verify that the reader is set to RF ON (#6401).
Verify that the external antenna is connected correctly.

7 The Encompass 4 Reader Different commands were probably used to support the other
came from another site and site’s specific configuration. You can restore the factory
does not work the way the defaults by using a terminal emulation program to switch to
factory defaults indicate that command mode and issuing command #66F Load Default
it should. Operating Parameters. All factory defaults except RF
frequency will be restored.

8 When connected to a PC The Encompass 4 Reader works. The software is now loaded.
that is running terminal YYYYYY is the TransCore-assigned serial number for this
communications software, a Encompass 4 Reader. However, if YYYYYY = 000000, a serial
just-powered up Encompass number has never been assigned. If a serial number has not
4 Reader displays one of the been assigned to your Encompass 4 Reader, contact
following messages: TransCore Technical Support.
#Model E4 Series X.XX
SNYYYYYY
#[Copyright notice]

9-5
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table 9-2 Symptoms and Remedies (continued)

Symptom
Symptom Remedy
Numbera

9 The read zone is too small, If another Encompass 4 Reader is in the same area, ensure
even before the RF power that it is operating on another frequency that is at least 2 MHz
and range control have been different.
adjusted.
Check for possible interference from another nearby RF
source: fluorescent lights, neon signs, high voltage power
lines, nearby cellular telephone, or radio stations. Lights will
need to be removed or shielded. Point the Encompass 4
Reader or external antenna in a different direction to see if
interference comes from only one direction. You may require a
different Encompass 4 Reader that uses another frequency.
Verify that the RF power is set to an appropriate value.
Verify that the range adjustment is set to the maximum.
Verify that the reader is getting at least 16V.

10 The perimeter of the read The angle of the Encompass 4 Reader or external antenna
zone has been defined, but may need adjustment. Slightly tilt the Encompass 4 Reader or
there is a “hollow” spot in the external antenna to a different angle to change either the
center of the zone that does length or width of the read zone.
not read tags.
Check the range control adjustment. See “Radio Frequency”
on page 8-15.

11 The Encompass 4 Reader is Some interference from other RF or electrical sources may be
reading tags out of the occurring. See “Reflection, Refraction, and Diffraction of RF
desired read zone, or cross- Signals” on page 2-15.
lane reads are occurring.
Verify that the read zone has been properly set up. See “Fine-
Tuning and Verifying the Read Zone” on page 8-19.

12 The Encompass 4 Reader is Ensure that the Encompass 4 Reader is in Wiegand mode
not providing any output to (#451). The default is either RS–232 or RS–422 mode. Refer
the Wiegand interface. to “Wiegand Interface” on page 4-25.
Ensure the tags are properly programmed with Wiegand data.

aUse this number to reference the problem you are having with the Encompass 4 Reader if you contact
Transcore for Technical Support.

Encompass 4 Reader Repair

The Encompass 4 Reader is designed for whole-unit replacement and is manufactured
with surface-mounted components. It requires sophisticated testing and repair equip-
ment. All testing and repairs are performed at TransCore’s factory. Please contact
TransCore to obtain a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) for returning the reader.

Technical Support
Authorized dealers and distributors are responsible for the direct support of all cus-
tomers. Authorized dealers and distributors needing support can locate the appropriate

9-6
 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

contact phone number at www.transcore.com/rfidsupport. Send faxes to (214) 461-

6478 ATTN: Technical Support. Please be prepared to answer a series of questions
that are designed to direct you to the best TransCore support resource available. These
questions will relate to symptoms, configuration, model, and tags used.
Note: End users and facility operators contacting Technical Support will be referred
to the dealer responsible for the system sale.

Marketing Support
Dealers requiring marketing support may call TransCore Marketing at
(214) 461-4031, 9:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Central Standard Time, Monday through Fri-
day. Send faxes to (214) 461-6478 ATTN: TransCore Marketing.

Find a Problem with the Encompass 4 Reader or Have

Suggestions?
Send faxes to (214) 461-6478 ATTN: Encompass 4 Reader product manager.

9-7
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

9-8
 A
Glossary
 Appendix A
Glossary

AAR Association of American Railroads

AC alternating current
ACK acknowledge (data valid)
ANSI American National Standards Institute
antenna passive device that converts RF energy into magnetic energy (RF signal)
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
ATA American Trucking Association
aux auxiliary
AWG AWG (American Wire Gauge) is a U.S. standard set of non-ferrous wire conductor
sizes

backscatter portion of an RF signal that is modulated by a tag and radiated back to the reader
baud measure of number of bits per second of a digital signal; for example, 9600 baud =
9600 bits per second
BCKS boot checksum
BCM buffer control mode
bps bits per second
byte a binary character; for example, one 8-bit ASCII character

check tag tag mounted inside a reader assembly, inside or in close proximity to an external
antenna that is used to check operation of the reader

A-3
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

cmd command
comm communications
command data set that is recognized by the receiving device as intending to elicit a specific
response
conduit flexible steel pipe use for electrical wiring
cps characters per second
CR carriage return
CRC cyclic redundancy check
CTRL control
CTS clear to send

data information that is processed by a computing device

DC direct current
DIAG diagnostic

ECP error correcting protocol

ECPS error correcting protocol status
eGo proprietary name for ANS INCITS 256-2001 compliant TransCore tag products. A
registered trademark of TCP IP, Ltd.
eGo Plus proprietary name for ANS INCITS 256-2001 and ISO 18000-6B compliant TransCore
tag products. Super eGo is a superset of the eGo protocol. A registered trademark of
TCP IP, Ltd.
Encompass proprietary name for ANS INCITS 256-2001 compliant TransCore reader products. A
trademark of TC IP, Ltd.
eol end of line
eom end of message
EPROM erasable programmable read-only memory

A-4
 Glossary

field physical area/space in which a tag can be read by the reader; also, an element of a data
record/frame. For example, division within a tag's data frame.
frames consecutive bits of data in memory that are read and written as a group
frequency bands a range of RF frequencies assigned for transmission by an RF device

hex hexadecimal
hexadecimal base 16 numbering system that uses the characters 0 though 9 and A through F to
resent the digits 0 through 16
host device, generally a computer, that is connected to the Encompass 4 Reader through the
communications port

I/O or IO circuits input/output circuits

ID identification; encoded information unique to a particular tag
INCITS American National Standards Institute International Committee for Information
Technology standards
Intellitag Proprietary name for ANS INCITS 256-2001 compliant Intermec products. A
registered trademark of Intermec Technologies Corporation, a UNOVA Company.
interface connection point for communication with another device
IOST I/O status
ISO International Standardization Organization

LF line feed

m meter

A-5
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

MHz megahertz
mode method of operation
ms milliseconds

NAK negative acknowledgment (data not valid)

passback used to refer to a tag ID that is not passed on to the tag buffer
PC personal computer
PCKS EPROM flash checksum
protocol specified convention for the format of data messages communicated between devices
PRST presence status
PWRB power fail bit

RAM random access memory

RDID reader ID
read process of acquiring data from a device; for example, from a tag or from computer
memory
reader controlled interrogating device capable of acquiring data from a device; for example,
acquiring and interrupting data from a tag
read zone the physical area in which a tag can be read by the reader
RF radio frequency
RFID radio frequency identification
RFST RF status
ROM read-only memory
RTC real-time clock
RTS request-to-send

A-6
 Glossary

SCTS status of check tag status

SeGo Super eGo (SeGo) is a superset of the eGo protocol
SN serial number
som start of message
SSTC input status change reporting options

tag small self-contained device acting as an identifying transponder

Tau timeout delay
TT tag translation

V volts
Ver version (software)

Wiegand the trade name for a technology used in card readers and sensors, particularly for
access control applications. Wiegand devices were originally developed by HID
Corporation.
write process of recording data; for example, writing to computer memory or to a tag’s
memory. Writing writes over (erases) previous data stored at the specified memory
locations.
WTI Wiegand retransmit interval

XON/XOFF protocol for controlling the flow of data between computers and other devices on an
asynchronous serial connection. X/ON and X/OFF are signals to turn a transmitter on
or off. The actual signal for X/ON is the same bit configuration as the ASCII Ctrl-Q
keyboard combination (11 hexadecimal). The X/OFF signal is the Ctrl-S character (13
hexadecimal).

A-7
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

A-8
 B
Technical Specifications
 Appendix B
Technical Specifications

Reader Specifications

Communications

Frequency Selection 860 to 930 MHz capable

Reading Range Read performance varies depending on tag,
reader, and external antenna (if required) config-
uration and environment. Optimum read range
using the eGo® Plus Sticker Tag is 24.3 ft (7.4
m).
Typical read range should be 12 to 17 ft (3.7 to
5.2 m).a
a. Reading range depends on reader or external antenna configu-
ration, tag type, tag read mode, and operating environment.

Hardware Features

Integrated System RF module, tag decoder, external antenna (if

and/or integrated sys- required), power supply, I/O ports, and serial
tem with connector for communications interface all housed in a single
external antenna package.
Case Weatherproof enclosure. The system is sealed in
a tamper-proof, polycarbonate housing.

Power Requirements

Input Voltage 16 to 20V AC, 47 to 63 Hz

or
16 to 28V DC

Physical Attributes

Size 15.5 x 15.5 x 3.25 in (39.4 x 39.4 x 8.25 cm)

Weight 9.5 lb (4.3 kg)

B-3
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Environmental Parameters

Operating Temperature -40°F to +131°F (-40°C to +55°C)

Humidity 100% noncondensing
Vibration Tolerance 0.5 Grms, 10 to 500 Hz

Options

Communications Interface RS–232 and Wiegand or RS–422 and Wiegand

Cable Accessory Kits 58-1620-001: Connector with 5 ft (1.5 m) cable

58-1620-002: Connector with 20 ft (6.1 m) cable
58-1620-006: Connector with 35 ft (10.7 m)
cable
Wall Mount Bracket Allows adjustment in all planes when used to
install the Encompass 4 Reader on a flat surface.
Include the part number 54-1620-001 when
ordering.
Transformer A Class C transformer is available to allow 110V
AC to 18V AC conversion.
Include the part number 76-1620-005 when
ordering.
A Class C transformer (part number 76-1620-
008) to allow 220V AC to 18V AC conversion is
available by special request.

B-4
 C
Wiring Tables
 Appendix C
Wiring Tables

This appendix contains tables that show the wiring connections used to
test and install the Encompass® 4 Reader.

Communications Interfaces
Table C-1 lists the interfaces available with the Encompass 4 Reader.

Table C-1 Communications Interfaces and Conductor Requirements

Number of
Interface
Conductors

RS–232 3

RS–232 with RTS and CTS hardware handshake signals 5

RS–422 4

Wiegand 3

Figure C-1 shows the pin assignments for the RS–232 interface signal to the host male
DB9 and DB25 connectors.

C-3
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Figure C-1 DB9 and DB25 Connector Pin Assignments for Signal to Host
Note: In Figure C-1, supported pin assignments are boldface.

Cable Supplied with the Encompass 4 Reader

The Encompass 4 Reader is delivered with a multiwire cable (ordered as a separate
accessory), which is a 13-pair pigtail. An alternate 15-pair pigtail may be substituted.
The 13-pair pigtail is a colored-wire pair cable, with different colors denoting the indi-
vidual pairs, one pair of which is red/black. The alternate 15-pair pigtail is a red/black-
wire pair cable, with numbers on the pairs to denote the individual pairs. Two pairs of
the 15-pair pigtail, numbers 14 and 15, are not used.
The following tables show the colored-wire pair (13-pair) and alternate wire pair
(15-pair) assignments for the various interfaces, power, and input/output connections.

C-4
 Wiring Tables

RS–232 Interface
Table C-2 shows the RS–232 assignments for colored-wire pair (13-pair) cable.

Table C-2 RS–232 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connect Connect
Signal from Wire to Wire to
Encompass Wire Pair
from Host DB9 Host DB25
4 Reader Color Used
Encompass 4 Pin Pin
Reader

TxD — Black Pin 2 Pin 3

Encompass
4 Reader output
Red/Black
RxD — Red Pin 3 Pin 2
Encompass
4 Reader input

Signal ground Yellow/Black Yellow or Pin 5 Pin 7

Black

Optional for hardware handshaking

RTS — Yellow Pin 8 Pin 5

Encompass
4 Reader output
Yellow/Red
CTS — Red Pin 7 Pin 4
Encompass
4 Reader input

Table C-3 shows the RS–232 assignments for alternate wire (15-pair) cable.

Table C-3 RS–232 Interface Signal Wiring for Alternate Wire Cable

Alternate Wire Cable Connect Connect

Signal from Wire to Wire to
Encompass 4 Reader Host DB9 Host DB25
Pairing Color Pin Pin

TxD — Encompass Black Pin 2 Pin 3

4 Reader output
Pair 1
RxD — Encompass Red Pin 3 Pin 2
4 Reader input

Signal ground Pair 5 Black or Pin 5 Pin 7

Red

C-5
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table C-3 RS–232 Interface Signal Wiring for Alternate Wire Cable (continued)

Optional for hardware handshaking

RTS — Encompass Black Pin 8 Pin 5

4 Reader output
Pair 11
CTS — Encompass Red Pin 7 Pin 4
4 Reader input

RS–422 Interface
Table C-4 shows the RS–422 assignments for colored-wire pair (13-pair) cable.

Table C-4 RS–422 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Signal from Encompass Connect to

Wire Pair Signal from
4 Reader from
Color Used Host
Encompass 4
Reader

RS–422 Transmit positive Yellow Receive (+)

Yellow/Red
RS–422 Transmit negative Red Receive (–)

RS–422 Receive positive Black Transmit (+)

Red/Black
RS–422 Receive negative Red Transmit (–)

Signal Ground Yellow/Black Yellow or Signal Ground

Black

Table C-5 shows the RS–422 assignments for alternate wire (15-pair) cable.

Table C-5 RS–422 Interface Signal Wiring for Alternate Wire Cable

Alternate Wire Cable Connect to

Signal from Encompass
Signal from
4 Reader
Pairing Color Host

RS–422 Transmit positive Black Receive (+)

Pair 11
RS–422 Transmit negative Red Receive (–)

RS–422 Receive positive Black Transmit (+)

Pair 1
RS–422 Receive negative Red Transmit (–)

C-6
 Wiring Tables

Wiegand Interface
Table C-6 shows the Wiegand assignments for colored-wire pair (13-pair) cable.

Table C-6 Wiegand Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connect to
Signal from Encompass 4
Wire Pair from Signal from
Reader
Encompass Color Used Host
4 Reader

Wiegand Zero Output Blue Data0

Blue/Red
Wiegand One Output Red Data1

Signal Ground Yellow/Black Yellow or Black Ground

Table C-7 shows the Wiegand assignments for alternate wire (15-pair) cable.

Table C-7 Wiegand Interface Signal Wiring for Alternate Wire Cable

Alternate Wire Cable

Connect to
Signal from Encompass
Signal from
4 Reader Host
PairingColor

Wiegand Zero output Black Data0

Pair 10
Wiegand One output Red Data1

Signal Ground Pair 5 Black or Red Ground

Power Supply Connections

AC Power
Table C-8 shows the colored-wire pair (13-pair) assignments for connection to a low-
voltage AC power supply.

Table C-8 AC Transformer Connections for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connect to
Signal From Encompass
Wire Pair from Transformer
4 Reader
Encompass Color Used Terminal Strip
4 Reader

Main power input Brown/ L1

Orange 16-20V AC
Brown/Red and
Orange/Red
Main power return Red/Red L2
16-20V AC

C-7
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table C-9 shows the alternate wire (15-pair) assignments for connection to a low-volt-
age AC power supply.

Table C-9 AC Transformer Connections for Alternate Wire Cable

Alternate Wire Cable Connect to

Signal from Encompass Transformer
4 Reader Terminal
Pairing Color Strip

Main power input Black/Black L1

16-20V AC
Pair 12 and
Pair 13
Main power return Red/Red L2
16-20V AC

Low-Voltage DC Power
Table C-10 shows the colored-wire pair (13-pair) assignments for connection to a low-
voltage DC power supply.

Table C-10 Low Voltage DC Cable Connections for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Signal from
Encompass Wire Pair Connection Use
4 Reader from
Encompass 4 Color Used
Reader

Main power input Brown and 16 to 28V DC + terminal

Brown/Red Orange
and
Main power return Orange/Red Red and 16 to 28V DC – terminal
Red

Table C-11 shows the alternate wire (15-pair) assignments for connection to a low-
voltage DC power supply.

Table C-11 Low Voltage DC Cable Connections for Alternate Wire Cable

Signal from Alternate Wire Cable

Encompass 4 Connection Use
Reader Pairing Color

Main power input Black and 16 to 28V DC + terminal

Pair 12 and Black
Pair 13
Main power return Red and Red 16 to 28V DC – terminal

C-8
 Wiring Tables

Input/Output Cabling Assignments

Table C-12 shows the sense input/output assignments for colored-wire pair (13-pair)
cable.

Table C-12 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Pair Pin Color Signal Description Typical Function

Blue/ E Blue WGND0 Wiegand data0 Parking/access

Red control
applications

F Red WGND1 Wiegand data1 Parking/access

control
applications

White/ L White Lock Tag lock output, Testing

Red active-closed maintenance

M Red Lock_RTN Tag lock return Testing

maintenance

Green/ N Green Sense Input0 Sense Input0 Loop and

Red (loop), active- presence detection
closed

P Red Sense Sense Input0 Loop and

Input0_RTN return; not presence detection
isolated from
signal ground

Blue/ R Blue Sense Input1 Sense Input1, General-purpose

Black active-closed sense input, not
used to detect
presence

S Black Sense Sense Input1 General-purpose

Input1_RTN return; not sense input, not
isolated from used to detect
signal ground presence

Brown/ T Black Sense Sense Output0 Switched output to

Black Output0_COM (tag detect), control gate
common terminal

U Brown Sense Sense Output0, Switched output to

Output0_NO normally open control gate
terminal

Orange/ V Black Sense Sense Output0 Switched sense

Black Output0_COM (tag detect output for any
output), common external control
terminal (light, gate, buzzer,
etc.)

C-9
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table C-12 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Pair Pin Color Signal Description Typical Function

W Orange Sense Output Sense Output0, Switched sense

0_NC normally closed output for any
terminal external control
(light, gate, buzzer,
etc.)

Green/ X Black Sense Sense Output1, Switched sense

Black Output1_ COM common terminal output

Y Green Sense Sense Output1, Switched sense

Output1_NO normally open output
terminal

White/ Z Black Sense Sense Output1, Switched sense

Black Output1_COM common output

a White Sense Sense Output1, Switched sense

Output1_NC normally closed output
terminal

Yellow/ b Yellow GND logic ground Signal ground

Black (used with RS–
232 and Wiegand
communications)

c Black GND logic ground Signal ground

(used with RS–
232 and Wiegand
communications)

Table C-13 shows the sense input/output assignments for alternate wire (15-pair)
cable.

Table C-13 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments for Alternate Wire Cable

Alternate Wire Cable

Signal Description Typical Function
Pairing Pin Color

Pair 10 E Black WGND0 Wiegand data0 Parking/access

control applications

F Red WGND1 Wiegand data1 Parking/access

control applications

Pair 8 L Black Lock Tag lock sense Testing maintenance

output, active-
closed

M Red Lock_RTN Tag lock return Testing maintenance

Pair 9 N Black Sense Input0 Sense Input0 Loop and presence

(loop), active- detection
closed

C-10
 Wiring Tables

Table C-13 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments for Alternate Wire Cable

Alternate Wire
Signal Description Typical Function
Pairing Pin Color

P Red Sense Sense Input0 Loop and presence

Input0_RTN return; not isolated detection
from signal ground

Pair 4 R Black Sense Input1 Sense Input1, General-purpose

active-closed sense input, not used
to detect presence

S Red Sense Sense Input1 General-purpose

Input1_RTN return; not isolated sense input, not used
from signal ground to detect presence

Pair 6 T Black Sense Sense Output0 Switched sense

Output0_COM (tag detect), output to control gate
common terminal

U Red Sense Sense Output0, Switched sense

Output0_NO normally open output to control gate
terminal

Pair 7 V Black Sense Sense Output0 Switched sense

Output0_COM (tag detect output), output for any
common terminal external control (light,
gate, buzzer, etc.)

W Red Sense Sense Output0, Switched sense

Output0_NC normally closed output for any
terminal external control (light,
gate, buzzer, etc.)

Pair 3 X Black Sense Sense Output1, Switched sense

Output1_COM common terminal output

Y Red Sense Sense Output1, Switched sense

Output1_NO normally open output
terminal

Pair 2 Z Black Sense Sense Output1, Switched sense

Output1_COM common terminal output

a Red Sense Sense Output1, Switched sense

Output1_NO normally closed output
terminal

Pair 5 b Black GND logic ground Signal ground (used

with RS–232 and
Wiegand
communications)

c Red GND logic ground Signal ground (used

with RS–232 and
Wiegand
communications)

C-11
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Summary Table
Table C-14 shows all assignments for both colored-wire pair (13-pair) and alternate
wire (15-pair) cables.

Table C-14 All Cabling Assignments for Colored-Wire Pair Cable or Alternate Wire Cable

Colored-Wire Pair Alternate Wire

Cable Cable
Signal Description Typical Function
Pair Pin Color Pair Color

A Black Black TX232, RS–232 transmit, Encompass 4

RX422+, RS–422 receive Reader output, host
IF485- positive, RS-485 input
negative
Red/
Pair 1
Black
B Red Red RX232, RS–232 receive, Encompass 4
RX422-, RS–422 receive Reader input, host
IF485+ negative, RS-485 output
positive

C Yellow Black RTS232, RS–232 request Encompass 4

TX422 to send or RS– Reader output, host
422 transmit input for hardware
positive handshaking
Yellow/
Red Pair 11
D Red Red CTS232, RS–232 clear to Encompass 4
TX422 send or RS–422 Reader input, host
transmit negative output for hardware
handshaking

E Blue Black WGND0 Wiegand data0 Parking/access

control applications
Blue/
Pair 10
Red F Red Red WGND1 Wiegand data1 Parking/access
control applications

G Orange Black 18V Main power input

Orange
Pair 13
/Red H Red Red 18V_RTN Main power return

J Brown Black 18V Main power input

Brown/
Pair 12
Red
K Red Red 18V_RTN Main power return

L White Black Lock Tag lock sense Testing

output, active- maintenance
White/ closed
Pair 8
Red
M Red Red Lock_RTN Tag lock return Testing
maintenance

C-12
 Wiring Tables

Table C-14 All Cabling Assignments for Colored-Wire Pair Cable or Alternate Wire Cable (continued)

Colored-Wire Pair Alternate Wire

Cable Cable
Signal Description Typical Function
Pair Pin Color Pair Color

N Green Black Sense Input0 Sense input0 Loop and presence

(loop), active- detect
closed
Green/
Pair 9
Red P Red Red Sense Sense input0 Loop and presence
Input0_RTN return; not detect
isolated from
signal ground

R Blue Black Sense Input1 Sense input1, General-purpose

active-closed sense input, not
used to detect
presence.
Blue/
Pair 4
Black
S Black Red Sense Sense input1 General-purpose
Input1_RTN return; not sense input, not
isolated from used to detect
signal ground presence.

T Black Black Sense Sense output0 Switched sense

Output0_COM (tag detect), output to control
common terminal gate
Brown/ Pair 6
Black
U Brown Red Sense Sense output0, Switched sense
Output0_NO normally open output to control
terminal gate

V Black Black Sense Sense output0 Switched sense

Output0_COM (tag detect output for any
output), common external control
terminal (light, gate, buzzer,
etc.)
Orange
Pair 7
/Black
W Orange Red Sense Sense output0, Switched sense
Output0_NC normally closed output for any
terminal external control
(light, gate, buzzer,
etc.)

X Black Black Sense Sense output1, Switched sense

Output1_COM common terminal output.
Green/
Pair 3
Black Y Green Red Sense Sense output1, Switched sense
Output1_NO normally open output
terminal

Z Black Black Sense Sense output1, Switched sense

Output1_COM common terminal output
White/
Black a White Pair 2 Red Sense Sense output1, Switched sense
Output1_NC normally closed output
terminal

C-13
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table C-14 All Cabling Assignments for Colored-Wire Pair Cable or Alternate Wire Cable (continued)

Colored-Wire Pair Alternate Wire

Cable Cable
Signal Description Typical Function
Pair Pin Color Pair Color

b Yellow Black GND logic ground Signal ground

(used with RS–232
and Wiegand
communications)
Yellow/
Pair 5
Black
c Black Red GND logic ground Signal ground
(used with RS–232
and Wiegand
communications)

C-14
 D
Command Quick Reference
 Appendix D
Command Quick Reference

This appendix lists the default configuration settings for the

Encompass® 4 Reader and its commands. Commands are listed both
numerically and alphabetically.

Command Syntax
The command numbers consist of from 2 to 4 hex digits. The letters N or S may follow
a command number. The letter N indicates that part of the command number is vari-
able. The letter S indicates the requirement for an alphanumeric data string that is to
be included immediately following the command number. Hex digits (0–9, A–F) in
either uppercase or lowercase characters may be used in data strings and for hex digits
A–F. For more information see Chapter 5, “General Software Information” .
Table D-1 lists factory default settings. Table D-2 on page D-5 lists, in numerical
order, all of the commands available to users. Table D-3 on page D-17 lists the same
commands by command name.

Factory Default Settings

Note: Table D-1 lists the factory default settings for the Encompass 4 Reader.

Table D-1 Encompass 4 Reader Default Configuration Settings

Parameter Setting Command

Operating mode Data 00

Baud rate 9600 1005

Stop bits 1 1010

Parity None 1020

Time and data appended Enabled 302

Auxiliary information appended Disabled 310

Unique ID code criteria Separation of 1 ID 4100

Valid ID code criteria Acquisition of 1 ID 4200

Uniqueness time-out 2 minutes 441

Wiegand mode Disabled 450

D-3
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table D-1 Encompass 4 Reader Default Configuration Settings (continued)

Parameter Setting Command

Tag translation mode Disabled 452

Multi-tag sort Disabled 454

eGo or eGo Plus Tag initialization Enabled 456

during multi-tag sort

Second alternate group select Disabled 458

Wiegand transmit mode 1 second 4601

Third alternate group select Disabled 490

Fourth alternate group select Disabled 492

Fifth alternate group select Disabled 494

Alternate group select Disabled 496

Reader ID number 00 6000

Communications protocol Basic 610

Error correcting protocol (ECP) 12.7 sec 612FE

timeout

Flow control Software (XON/XOFF) 6141

Buffer control mode Disabled 6160

Echo mode Enabled 6171

Set output control Turn on both outputs 6203

Sense output control Predefined 621

RF-by-input control Enabled 641

ATA operating range Maximum 6431F

RF attenuation Full power 64400

eGo or eGo Plus operating range Maximum 6451F

Sense output pulse duration 228 ms 67C

Presence without tag reports Disabled 6900

RF-off control Timeout or no presence 6922

RF timeout Never true 693F

Input inversion Disabled 6940

Serial number NNNNNN 695

Store hardware configuration Hardware configuration not 696

known

D-4
 Command Quick Reference

Table D-1 Encompass 4 Reader Default Configuration Settings (continued)

Parameter Setting Command

Input status change reports Disabled 820

Automatic periodic RF status Disabled 830

report

Numerical Command List

The following conventions are used in Table D-2:
• Items in bold italics identify factory default settings.

• Only the command-related data portion of the reader message is shown.

Refer to Chapter 6, “Communication Protocols,” for the complete syntax of com-
mands and messages.

Table D-2 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Numerically

Number Command Name Reader Message

00 Switch to data mode Done

01 Switch to command mode Done

06 Transmit buffer entry Done, error, or tag data

Done = buffer empty
Error = not in buffer control
mode
Tag data = highest priority tag
ID

1002 Set baud rate = 1200 baud Done

1003 Set baud rate = 2400 baud Done

1004 Set baud rate = 4800 baud Done

1005 Set baud rate = 9600 baud Done

1006 Set baud rate = 19.2 K baud Done

1007 Set baud rate = 38.4 K baud Done

1010 Use one stop bit Done

1011 Use two stop bits Done

1020 Disable parity Done

1021 Select even parity Done

1022 Select odd parity Done

D-5
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table D-2 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

20 Set time Done

21 Set date Done

22 Display time and date Time and date

300 No time and date appended Done

302 Time and date appended Done

310 Disable aux info append Done

311 Enable aux info append Done

40 Transmit all IDs Done

4100 Select one ID separation Done

4101 Select two ID separation Done

4102 Select three ID separation Done

4103 Select four ID separation Done

4200 Select 1 valid ID code Done

4201 Select 2 valid ID codes Done

4202 Select 3 valid ID codes Done

4203 Select 4 valid ID codes Done

43 Buffer all ID codes Done

440 Reset uniqueness Done

441 Set uniqueness time-out to 2 Done

minutes

442 Set uniqueness time-out to 15 Done

seconds

443 Set uniqueness time-out to 30 Done

seconds

450 Disable Wiegand mode Done

451 Enable Wiegand mode Done

454 Disable multi-tag sort Done

455 Enable multi-tag sort Done

D-6
 Command Quick Reference

Table D-2 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

456 Enable eGo or eGo Plus Tag Done

initialization during multi-tag
sort

457 Disable eGo or eGo Plus Tag Done

initialization during multi-tag sort

458 Disable second alternate group Done

select

459 Enable second alternate group Done

select

46NN Set Wiegand retransmit interval Done

NN = 01–FF seconds
01 =factory default

480 Disable ATA Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag
protocol. Error if tag protocol is
unsupported.

481 Enable ATA Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag
protocol. Error if tag protocol is
unsupported.

482 Disable eGo Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag
protocol. Error if tag protocol is
unsupported.

483 Enable eGo Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag
protocol. Error if tag protocol is
unsupported.

484 Disable SeGo Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag
protocol. Error if tag protocol is
unsupported.

485 Enable SeGo Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag
protocol. Error if tag protocol is
unsupported.

486 Disable IAG Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag
protocol. Error if tag protocol is
unsupported.

D-7
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table D-2 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

487 Enable IAG Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag
protocol. Error if tag protocol is
unsupported.

488 Disable eATA Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag
protocol. Error if tag protocol is
unsupported.

489 Enable eATA Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag
protocol. Error if tag protocol is
unsupported.

490 Disable third alternate group Done

select

491 Enable third alternate group Done

select

492 Disable fourth alternate group Done

select

493 Enable fourth alternate group Done

select

494 Disable fifth alternate group Done

select

495 Enable fifth alternate group select Done

496 Disable alternate group select Done

497 Enable alternate group select Done

505 Display version Model [model]

Ver [version no.] SN [serial no.]

506 Display hardware configuration S...S

information S...S = ASCII string
(maximum length of 20
characters)

510 Display RF transceiver FPGA RF FPGA VER = XX.XX

version

511 Display RF transceiver I filter chip FIL IC I VER = XX.XX

version

512 Display RF transceiver Q filter FIL IC Q VER = XX.XX

chip version

513 Display DSP board Actel version DSP FPGA VER = XX.XX

D-8
 Command Quick Reference

Table D-2 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

520 Display power fail bit PWRB Px R0

P0 = no power fail has occurred
P1 = power fail has occurred
R0 = not applicable

521 Display reader ID number RDID xx

xx = 00–FF

522 Display comm port parameters MAIN Bx Sx Px D0

B2 = 1200
B3 = 2400
B4 = 4800
B5 = 9600
B6 = 19.2
B7 = 38.4
S0 = one stop bit
S1 = two stop bits
P0 = no parity
P1 = even
P2 = odd
D0 = EOL delay of 0 ms

524 Display appended info status IDAP T0 D0 Xx

T0 = time not appended
T1 = time appended
D0 = date not appended
D1 = date appended
X0 = aux info not appended
X1 = aux info appended

525 Display comm protocol ECPS Px Txx Xx S0

P0 = basic
P1 = ECP
P2 = echo Inquiry
Txx = ECP timeout
ms = 50 * xx
FF = disabled ECP timeout
X0 = no flow control
X1 = software flow control
X2 = hardware flow control
S0 = som character is #

D-9
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table D-2 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

526 Display I/O status IOST Cx Ox Ix Dx

C0 = host controls outputs
C1 = predefined output mode
O0 = both outputs off
O1 = output0 on
O2 = output1 on
O3 = both outputs on
I0 = both inputs false
I1 = input0 true
I2 = input1 true
I3 = both inputs true
D0 - DF = output pulse duration
where
D0 = 4 ms
D1 = 8 ms
D2 = 12 ms
D3 = 16 ms
D4 = 20 ms
D5 = 24 ms
D6 = 32 ms
D7 = 40 ms
D8 = 48 ms
D9 = 60 ms
DA = 76 ms
DB = 152 ms
DC = 228 ms
DD = 300 ms
DE = 376 ms
DF = 752 ms

D-10
 Command Quick Reference

Table D-2 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

527 Display RF status RFST Cx Ox Tx Fxxx Rxx Gxx

Axx Ixx
C0 = RF controlled by host
C1 = RF-by-presence sensor
O0 = RF off
O1 = RF on
T1 = uniqueness timeout of 2
min
T2 = uniqueness timeout of 15
sec
T3 = uniqueness timeout of 30
sec
Fxxx = RF output frequency,
xxx = 000 to 118
Rxx = Tag decoder range
(distance) for ATA tags, 00 to 1F
hexadecimal range value
Gxx = Tag decoder range
(distance) for eGo Plus Tags, 00
to 1F hexadecimal range value
Axx = RF power attenuation, 00
max to 0A min (10 dB less than
max)
Ixx = IAG RF power attenuation,
00 max to 0F min (15 dB less
than max)
Note If you enter RF settings
using command
#642NN, the display
command for RF output
frequency, F is "Fxx" and
indicates use of the
backward-compatible
frequency entry method.

D-11
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table D-2 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

529 Display presence input status PRST Px D0 Ax Tx Ix

P0 = disable presence w/o tag
reports
P1 = enable presence w/o tag
reports
D0 = min presence true period
of 0 ms
A0 = RF off on timeout
A1 = RF off on timeout or tag
A2 = RF off on timeout or no
presence
T0: RF timeout of 0 ms (always
expired)
T1: RF timeout of 4 ms
T2: RF timeout of 8 ms
T3: RF timeout of 12 ms
T4: RF timeout of 20 ms
T5: RF timeout of 24 ms
T6: RF timeout of 32 ms
T7: RF timeout of 48 ms
T8: RF timeout of 60 ms
T9: RF timeout of 92 ms
TA: RF timeout of 152 ms
TB: RF timeout of 300 ms
TC: RF timeout of 452 ms
TD: RF timeout of 600 ms
TE: RF timeout of 752 ms
TF: RF timeout infinite, never
expires (factory default)
I0 = Input inversion disabled
(factory default)
I1 = Input inversion enabled

530 Display RF0 filter status RF0S Ux V0

U0 = one ID separation
U1 = two ID separation
U2 = transmit all IDs
U3 = buffer all IDs
V0 = valid ID code criteria of
one acquisition (fixed)

532 Display Wiegand mode status T0F x

0 = disabled
1 = enabled

533 Display Wiegand retransmit WTI xx

interval xx = 01–FF seconds

534 Display tag translation mode TT <0 to 1>

status 0 = tag translation mode
disabled
1 = tag translation mode
enabled

D-12
 Command Quick Reference

Table D-2 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

535 Display buffer control status BCM <0 to 1>

0 = buffer control mode disabled
1 = buffer control mode enabled

536 Display dual-frame processing DUAL <0 to 3>

mode 0 = reset uniqueness on A,
transmit A
1 = reset uniqueness on B,
transmit B
2 = reset uniqueness on A,
transmit both A and B
3 = reset uniqueness on B,
transmit both A and B

537 Display echo status ECHO x

0 = disabled
1 = enabled

540 Display flash checksum PCKS I0000 Exxxx

xxxx = 4-byte ASCII checksum

543 Display boot checksum BCKS xxxx

xxxx = 4-byte ASCII checksum

550 Display periodic check tag status SCTS M0 (fixed)

551 Display selected check tag option CTAG 0 (fixed)

560 Display input status change SSTC Ex Mx

E0 = status change reports
disabled
E1 = status change reports
enabled
M0 = no reporting
M1 = report change on input0
M2 = report change on input1
M3 = report change on either
input

570 Display operating mode status ATA:<E, D> eGo:<I, F, D>

SeGo:<I, F, D> IAG:<E, D>
Sort:<E, D>
I = ID (64 bits)
E = Enabled
F = Full transaction (eATA)
D = Disabled

577 Report buffered handshakes XX = number of handshakes

60NN Set reader ID number Done

NN = 00–FF
(00 = factory default)

610 Select basic protocol Done

D-13
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table D-2 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

611 Select ECP protocol Done

612NN Set ECP timeout Done

NN = 01–FE (1–255)
timeout = 50 ms * NN
(if NN = FF, timeout is
disabled)

612FE Set ECP timeout = 12.7 sec Done

613 Enable data inquiry protocol Done

6140 Disable flow control Done

6141 Enable software flow control Done

6142 Enable hardware flow control Done

6160 Disable buffer control mode Done

6161 Enable buffer control mode Done

6170 Disable echo Done

6171 Enable echo Done

6200 Turn both outputs off Done

6201 Turn output0 on Done

6202 Turn output1 on Done

6203 Turn both outputs on Done

621 Select predefined output mode Done

63 Reset reader Model [model]

Ver [version no.] SN [serial no.]
Copyright [date]
TransCore

6400 Turn off RF Done

6401 Turn on RF Done

6402 Turns on continuous wave RF Done

until commands 6400 or 641 are
received by the reader

641 Select RF-by-input control Done

642NN Select RF operating frequency Done

D-14
 Command Quick Reference

Table D-2 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

643NN Set ATA operating range Done

NN = 00 (shortest) to 1F (longest)
1F = default

644NN Set RF attenuation Done

NN = 00 to 0A

645NN Set eGo or eGo Plus operating Done

range NN = 00 (shortest) to
1F (longest)

646XX Set IAG RF attenuation Done

XX = 00 to 0F

647XXX Select RF operating frequency Done

from 860 to 930 in 250 kHz steps
XXX = 000 - 118 (hexadecimal)

65 Reset power fail bit Done

66F Load default operating Done

parameters (except RF operating
frequency)

67C Output pulse duration = 228 ms Done

set

67N Set output pulse duration N = 0–F Done

(4,8,12,16,20,24,32,40,48,60,76,
152, 228,300,376,752 ms)

6900 Disable presence without tag Done

reports

6901 Enable presence without tag Done

reports

6920 Turn RF off on timeout Done

6921 Turn RF off on timeout/tag Done

6922 Turn RF off on Done

timeout/no presence

693N Set RF timeout Done

N = 0–F
(always expired, 4,8,12,20,24,
32,48,60,92,152, 300,452,
600,752, infinite)

693F Set RF timeout = infinite Done

6940 Disable input inversion Done

6941 Enable input inversion Done

D-15
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table D-2 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

695S...S Set serial number Done

S...S = ASCII string
(maximum length of 6
characters)

696S...S Store hardware Done

configuration string
S...S = ASCII string
(maximum length of 20
characters)

820 Disable status change Done

reports

821 Report change on input0 Done

822 Report change on input1 Done

823 Report changes on both Done

830 Disable automatic periodic RF Done

status report

831 Enable automatic periodic RF Done

status report

D-16
 Command Quick Reference

Alphabetical Command List

The following conventions are used in Table D-3:
• Items in bold italics identify factory default settings.

• Only the command-related data portion of the reader message is shown.

Refer to Chapter 7 for the complete syntax of commands and messages.

Table D-3 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Alphabetically

Command Name Code Reader Message

All IDs buffer 43 Done

All IDs transmit 40 Done

Alternate fifth group select 494 Done

disable

Alternate fifth group select enable 495 Done

Alternate fourth group select 492 Done

disable

Alternate fourth group select 493 Done

enable

Alternate group select disable 496 Done

Alternate group select enable 497 Done

Alternate second group select 458 Done

disable

Alternate second group select 459 Done

enable

Alternate third group select 490 Done

disable

Alternate third group select 491 Done

enable

Appended info status display 524 IDAP T0 D0 Xx

T0 = time not appended
T1 = time appended
D0 = date not appended
D1 = date appended
X0 = aux info not appended
X1 = aux info appended

ATA disable 480 Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag protocol.
Error if tag protocol is
unsupported.

D-17
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table D-3 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

ATA enable 481 Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag protocol.
Error if tag protocol is
unsupported.

ATA operating range set 643NN Done

NN = 00 (shortest) to 1F (longest)
1F = default

Automatic periodic RF status 830 Done

report disable

Automatic periodic RF status 831 Done

report enable

Aux info append disable 310 Done

Aux info append enable 311 Done

Basic protocol select 610 Done

Baud rate = 1200 baud set 1002 Done

Baud rate = 19.2 K baud set 1006 Done

Baud rate = 2400 baud set 1003 Done

Baud rate = 38.4 K baud set 1007 Done

Baud rate = 4800 baud set 1004 Done

Baud rate = 9600 baud set 1005 Done

Boot checksum display 543 BCKS xxxx

xxxx = 4-byte ASCII checksum

Buffer control mode disable 6160 Done

Buffer control mode enable 6161 Done

Buffer control status display 535 BCM <0 to 1>

0 = buffer control mode disabled
1 = buffer control mode enabled

Buffer entry transmit 06 Done, error, or tag data

Done = buffer empty
Error = not in buffer control mode
Tag data = highest priority tag ID

Buffered handshake report 577 XX = number of handshakes

D-18
 Command Quick Reference

Table D-3 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

Comm port parameters display 522 MAIN Bx Sx Px D0

B0 = 110
B1 = 300
B2 = 1200
B3 = 2400
B4 = 4800
B5 = 9600
B6 = 19.2
B7 = 38.4
S0 = one stop bit
S1 = two stop bits
P0 = no parity
P1 = even
P2 = odd
D0 = EOL delay of 0 ms

Comm protocol display 525 ECPS Px Txx Xx S0

P0 = basic
P1 = ECP
P2 = data inquiry
Txx = ECP timeout
ms = 50 * xx
TFF = disabled ECP timeout
X0 = no flow control
X1 = software flow control
X2 = hardware flow control
S0 = SOM character is #

Command mode switch 01 Done

Data inquiry protocol enable 613 Done

Data mode switch 00 Done

Date set 21 Done

Default operating parameters 66F Done

load (except RF operating
frequency)

DSP board Actel version display 513 DSP FPGA VER = XX.XX

Dual-frame processing mode 536 DUAL <0 to 3>

display 0 = reset uniqueness on A,
transmit A
1 = reset uniqueness on B,
transmit B
2 = reset uniqueness on A,
transmit both A and B
3 = reset uniqueness on B,
transmit both A and B

D-19
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table D-3 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

eATA disable 488 Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag protocol.
Error if tag protocol is
unsupported.

eATA enable 489 Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag protocol.
Error if tag protocol is
unsupported.

Echo disable 6170 Done

Echo enable 6171 Done

Echo status display 537 ECHO x

0 = disabled
1 = enabled

ECP protocol select 611 Done

ECP timeout set = 12.7 sec 612FE Done

ECP timeout set 612NN Done

NN = 01–FE (1–255)
timeout = 50 ms * NN
(if NN = FF, timeout is disabled)

eGo disable 482 Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag protocol.
Error if tag protocol is
unsupported.

eGo enable 483 Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag protocol.
Error if tag protocol is
unsupported.

eGo Plus operating range set 645NN Done

NN = 00 (shortest) to 1F (longest)

eGo or eGo Plus Tag 456 Done

initialization during multi-tag
sort

eGo or eGo Plus Tag initialization 457 Done

during multi-tag sort disable

Even parity select 1021 Done

Flash checksum display 540 PCKS I0000 Exxxx

xxxx = 4-byte ASCII checksum

Flow control disable 6140 Done

D-20
 Command Quick Reference

Table D-3 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

Hardware configuration 506 S...S

information display S...S = ASCII string
(maximum length of
20 characters)

Hardware configuration string 696S...S Done

store
S...S = ASCII string
(maximum length of 20
characters)

Hardware flow control enable 6142 Done

I/O status display 526 IOST Cx Ox Ix Dx

C0 = host controls outputs
C1 = predefined output mode
O0 = both outputs off
O1 = output0 on
O2 = output1 on
O3 = both outputs on
I0 = both inputs false
I1 = input0 true
I2 = input1 true
I3 = both inputs true
D0 - DF = output pulse duration
where
D0 = 4 ms
D1 = 8 ms
D2 = 12 ms
D3 = 16 ms
D4 = 20 ms
D5 = 24 ms
D6 = 32 ms
D7 = 40 ms
D8 = 48 ms
D9 = 60 ms
DA = 76 ms
DB = 152 ms
DC = 228 ms
DD = 300 ms
DE = 376 ms
DF = 752 ms

IAG disable 486 Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag protocol.
Error if tag protocol is
unsupported.

IAG enable 487 Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag protocol.
Error if tag protocol is
unsupported.

IAG RF attenuation set 646XX Done

XX = 00 to 0F

D-21
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table D-3 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

Input inversion disable 6940 Done

Input inversion enable 6941 Done

Input status change display 560 SSTC Ex Mx

E0 = status change reports
disabled
E1 = status change reports
enabled
M0 = no reporting
M1 = report change on input0
M2 = report change on input1
M3 = report change on either
input

Input0 change report 821 Done

Input1 change report 822 Done

Multi-tag sort disable 454 Done

Multi-tag sort enable 455 Done

Odd parity select 1022 Done

Operating mode status display 570 ATA:<E, D> eGo:<I, F, D>

SeGo:<I, F, D> IAG:<E, D>
Sort:<E, D>
I = ID (64 bits)
E = Enabled
F = Full transaction (eATA)
D = Disabled

Output pulse duration = 228 ms 67C Done

set

Output pulse duration set 67N Done

N = 0–F
(4,8,12,16,20,24,32,40,48,60,76,
152, 228,300,376,752 ms)

Output0 turn on 6201 Done

Output1 turn on 6202 Done

Outputs turn off both 6200 Done

Outputs turn on both 6203 Done

Parity disable 1020 Done

Periodic check tag status display 550 SCTS M0 (fixed)

D-22
 Command Quick Reference

Table D-3 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

Power fail bit display 520 PWRB Px R0

P0 = no power fail has occurred
P1 = power fail has occurred
R0 = not applicable

Power fail bit reset 65 Done

Predefined output mode select 621 Done

Presence input status display 529 PRST Px D0 Ax Tx Ix

P0 = disable presence w/o tag
reports
P1 = enable presence w/o tag
reports
D0 = min presence true period
of 0 ms
A0 = RF off on timeout
A1 = RF off on timeout or tag
A2 = RF off on timeout or no
presence
T0: RF timeout of 0 ms (always
expired)
T1: RF timeout of 4 ms
T2: RF timeout of 8 ms
T3: RF timeout of 12 ms
T4: RF timeout of 20 ms
T5: RF timeout of 24 ms
T6: RF timeout of 32 ms
T7: RF timeout of 48 ms
T8: RF timeout of 60 ms
T9: RF timeout of 92 ms
TA: RF timeout of 152 ms
TB: RF timeout of 300 ms
TC: RF timeout of 452 ms
TD: RF timeout of 600 ms
TE: RF timeout of 752 ms
TF: RF timeout infinite, never
expires (factory default)
I0 = Input inversion disabled
(factory default)
I1 = Input inversion enabled

Presence without tag reports 6900 Done

disable

Presence without tag reports 6901 Done

enable

Reader ID number display 521 RDID xx

xx = 00–FF

Reader ID number set 60NN Done

NN = 00-FF
(00 = factory default)

D-23
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table D-3 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

Reader reset 63 Model [model]

Ver [version no.] SN [serial no.]
Copyright [date]
TransCore

Report changes both 823 Done

RF attenuation set 644NN Done

NN = 00 to 0A

RF CW turns on until commands 6402 Done

6400, 6401, or 641 are received
by reader

RF off on timeout 6920 Done

RF off on timeout/no presence 6922 Done

RF off on timeout/tag 6921 Done

RF turn off 6400 Done

RF turn on 6401 Done

RF on by input control 641 Done

RF operating frequency from 860 647XXX Done

to 930 in 250 kHz steps select
XXX = 000 - 118 (hexadecimal)

RF operating frequency select 642NN Done

D-24
 Command Quick Reference

Table D-3 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

RF status display 527 RFST Cx Ox Tx Fxxx Rxx Gxx

Axx Ixx
C0 = RF controlled by host
C1 = RF-by-presence sensor
O0 = RF off
O1 = RF on
T1 = uniqueness timeout of 2
min
T2 = uniqueness timeout of 15
sec
T3 = uniqueness timeout of 30
sec
Fxxx = RF output frequency,
xxx = 000 to 118
Rxx = Tag decoder range
(distance) for ATA tags, 00 to 1F
hexadecimal range value
Gxx = Tag decoder range
(distance) for eGo Plus Tags, 00
to 1F hexadecimal range value
Axx = RF power attenuation, 00
max to 0A min (10 dB less than
max)
Ixx = IAG RF power attenuation,
00 max to 0F min (15 dB less
than max)
If you enter RF settings using
command #642NN, the display
command for RF output
frequency, F is "Fxx" and
indicates use of the backward-
compatible frequency entry
method.

RF timeout = infinite set 693F Done

RF timeout set 693N Done

N = 0–F
(always expired, 4,8,12,20,24,32,
48,60,92,152,300,452,600,752
ms, infinite)

RF transceiver FPGA version 510 RF FPGA VER = XX.XX

display

RF transceiver I filter chip version 511 FIL IC I VER = XX.XX

display

RF transceiver Q filter chip 512 FIL IC Q VER = XX.XX

version display

RF0 filter status display 530 RF0S Ux V0

U0 = one ID separation
U1 = two ID
U2 = transmit all

D-25
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table D-3 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

SeGo disable 484 Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag protocol.
Error if tag protocol is
unsupported.

SeGo enable 485 Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag protocol.
Error if tag protocol is
unsupported.

Selected check tag option display 551 CTAG 0 (fixed)

Serial number set 695S...S Done

S...S = ASCII string
(maximum length of 6
characters)

Software flow control enable 6141 Done

Status change reports disable 820 Done

Stop bit use one 1010 Done

Stop bit use two 1011 Done

Tag ID separation select four 4103 Done

Tag ID separation select one 4100 Done

Tag ID separation select three 4102 Done

Tag ID separation select two 4101 Done

Tag translation mode status 534 TT <0 to 1>

display 0 = tag translation mode
disabled
1 = tag translation mode enabled

Time and date appended 302 Done

Time and date display 22 Time and date

Time and date not appended 300 Done

Time set 20 Done

Uniqueness reset 440 Done

Uniqueness time-out set to 2 441 Done

minutes

Uniqueness time-out set to 15 442 Done

seconds

D-26
 Command Quick Reference

Table D-3 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

Uniqueness time-out set to 30 443 Done

seconds

Valid ID code select four 4203 Done

Valid ID code select one 4200 Done

Valid ID code select three 4202 Done

Valid ID code select two 4201 Done

Version display 505 Model [model]

Ver [ver no.] SN [serial no.]

Wiegand mode disable 450 Done

Wiegand mode enable 451 Done

Wiegand mode status display 532 T0F x

0 = disabled
1 = enabled

Wiegand retransmit interval 533 WTI xx

display xx = 01–FF seconds

Wiegand retransmit interval set 46NN Done

NN = 01–FF seconds

D-27
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

D-28
 E
Compatible Tag Information
 Appendix E
Compatible Tag Information

This appendix gives helpful information about the tags that are
compatible with the Encompass® 4 Reader.

Tag Configurations

Table E-1 lists the TransCore Super eGo® (SeGo) protocol tags that are compatible
with the Encompass 4 Reader.

Table E-1 SeGo Protocol Tags

Number
Power Number Number of Special
Tag Tag Type of 6-bit ASCII of 128-Bit
Source Wiegand Features
Charactersa Framesa
Bits

eGo Plus 20 1 NA Very thin,

Sticker Tag flexible, multi-
10 1/2 26 to 54 layer
lamination
Toll, electronic
eGo Plus 20 1 NA Very thin,
Security vehicle flexible, multi-
Sticker Tag registration 10 1/2 26 to 54 layer
(EVR), Beam
lamination,
parking, tamper
security detection
access
eGo Plus 20 1 NA Water-
License Plate resistant,
Tag 10 1/2 26 to 54 exterior-
mounted

a. These fields apply to eATA-programmed tags only. Contact TransCore for information regarding tags
programmed with these features.

E-3
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table E-2 lists the Intellitag-programmed tags that are compatible with the
Encompass 4 Reader.
Table E-2 eGo Protocol Tags

Number
Number Number
Power of Special
Tag Tag Type of 6-bit ASCII of 128-Bit
Source Wiegand Features
Characters Frames
Bits

20 1 NA Very thin,
Windshield flexible,
Sticker Tag 10 1/2 26 to 54 multi-layer
Toll, EVR, lamination
parking,
Beam
security 20 1 NA Water-
License Plate access resistant,
Tag 10 1/2 26 to 54 exterior-
mounted

Table E-3 lists most ATA tag models that are compatible with the Encompass 4
Reader.

Table E-3 ATA Protocol Tags

Number
Tag Model Power of 6-Bit Number of
Number of Special
TagType 128-Bit
Number Source ASCII Wiegand Bits Features
Frames
Characters

AT5100 Toll Beam 20 1 N/A 915 MHz, thin

case, non-metal
window install

AT5102 Access Beam 10 1/2 26 to 54 915 MHz, thin

control case, non-metal
window install

AT5105 Access 5-yr 10 1/2 26 to 54 Multifrequency,

control battery thin case, non-
metal window
install

AT5106 Access 10-yr 10 1/2 26 to 54 Multifrequency,

control battery sealed case,
non-metal
window install
or non-metal
external install

AT5107 Access 10-yr 10 1/2 26 to 54 Multifrequency,

control battery sealed case,
metal external
install

AT5110 Trans- Beam 20 1 N/A 915 MHz

portation frequency,
metal external
install

E-4
 Compatible Tag Information

Table E-3 ATA Protocol Tags (continued)

Number
Number of
Tag Model Power of 6-Bit Number of Special
TagType 128-Bit
Number Source ASCII Wiegand Bits Features
Frames
Characters

AT5112 Access Beam 10 1/2 26 to 54 915 MHz

control, frequency,
transpor- metal external
tation install

AT5114 Access 10-yr 10 1/2 26 to 54 Multifrequency,

control, battery metal external
transpor- install
tation

AT5125 Trans- Beam 20 1 N/A 915 MHz

portation frequency;
high-
temperature
chemical-
resistant case,
metal external
install

AT5140 Toll 10-yr 20 1 N/A 915 MHz

battery frequency,
license plate
install

AT5145 Toll Beam 20 1 N/A 915 MHz

frequency,
license plate
install

AT5146 Access Beam 10 1/2 26 to 54 915 MHz,

control license plate
install

AT5147 Access 10-yr 10 1/2 26 to 54 915 MHz,

control battery license plate
install

AT5510 Trans- 10-yr 20 1 N/A Multifrequency,

portation battery metal external
install

AT5544 Toll 10-yr 20 1 N/A Multifrequency,

battery sealed case,
non-metal
window or
external install

AT5545 Toll 10-yr 20 1 N/A Multifrequency,

battery sealed case,
metal external
install

E-5
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Table E-3 ATA Protocol Tags (continued)

Number
Number of
Tag Model Power of 6-Bit Number of Special
TagType 128-Bit
Number Source ASCII Wiegand Bits Features
Frames
Characters

AT5547 Toll 5-yr 20 1 N/A Multifrequency,

battery thin case, non-
metal window
install

AT5704 Trans- External 4608 256 N/A Multifrequency,

portation dynamic tag,
metal external
install

AT5707 Trans- 8-yr 40a 2 N/A 915 MHz

portation battery frequency,
dynamic tag,
metal external
install

a. If desired, in place of 40 six-bit ASCII characters, the AT5707 can support

up to 34 seven-bit ASCII characters.

Tag Data Formats

Tags are programmed at the TransCore factory with the tag model number, date of
manufacture, and data format. Contact TransCore for special order entry procedures
for the format that applies to your system. The following four tag data formats can be
used:
• 10-character alphanumeric ASCII — Four alphanumeric characters are fixed and
can be used to identify either the dealer or the user. The remaining six positions
are numeric and should be unique for each tag issued. For example, the entry
ACME000001 might be specified as the first tag on the order entry form from
ACME Parking Garage.
• 20-character alphanumeric ASCII — Four alphanumeric characters are typically
fixed and the remaining 16 positions are numbered sequentially.
• Wiegand — Tags can be programmed in Wiegand formats with 26 to 54 bits. If
you choose this format, complete a Wiegand format worksheet — attached to the
order entry form — indicating the data to be programmed into the tags.
Note: Security access control tag models can be Wiegand-formatted. SeeTable E-1
through Table E-3 for Wiegand-compatible tag models.

• AAR/ISO — For requirements for this format, refer to ISO 10374 and the most
recent version of Association of American Railroads Standard for Automatic
Equipment Identification.

E-6
Index
 Index
A pole mount 4-13
AA3100 Yagi 2-8 wall mount 4-16
AA3101 Yagi 2-9 buffer
AA3110 Parapanel 2-9 all ID codes 7-12
AA3140 PCB Log Periodic 2-9 tag/message 5-6
AA3152 Universal Toll Antenna 2-9 buffer control
AA3153 Toll Antenna 2-10 status 7-27
AC power 4-6 buffer control error
ACK/NAK response 6-6 messages 7-32
alignment buffer control mode 7-31, 7-32
antenna and tag 2-10 buffered handshakes 7-29
reader and tag 2-4 bumper types 3-25
American Trucking Associations 1-3 buzz box
ANS NCITS 256-2001 3-3 See audible circuit tester
antenna
mounting 4-20 C
selection 2-8 cable
antenna interface 2-20 length 2-18
antenna mounting power and communications 2-16
curb-side 4-20 power extension 2-17
anti-pass back 7-11 cable length 2-16
append cabling accessory kits 2-16
auxiliary information 7-9 center island 2-13
append information commands 7-9 to 7-10 coaxial cable performance 2-20
appended information COM 1 properties dialog box 8-7
status 7-20 command entry conventions 5-3
appended tag data 8-13 Command Group 0
ASCII terminals 7-3 See reader mode control commands
assignments Command Group 1
colored-wire pair for RS–232 4-9, 4-24 See communication port control commands
pin 4-8, 4-23 Command Group 2
asynchronous message/command message collision 6-13 See real-time clock commands
ATA 1-3, 3-3 Command Group 3
operating range 7-38 See append information commands
audible circuit tester 4-5 Command Group 4
audience, system guide 1-3 See ID filtering commands
automatic periodic RF status report 7-45 Command Group 5
auxiliary information 7-9 See reader status commands
auxiliary reader control commands 7-45 to 7-46 Command Group 6
See reader control function commands
B Command Group 8
basic protocol 7-30 See auxiliary reader control commands
baud rate 7-6 command mode 7-4, 7-5
blind rivet installation 3-26 host transmission formats 6-7
boot checksum 7-28 sample messages 6-9
boot failure message 5-6 switch to 6-7
bracket command response conventions 5-4
factory-mounted 4-13 commands, list of 7-5 to 7-46
communication protocols 6-3

3
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

communications Wiegand interface 4-25

verifying 8-8 connecting sense input 4-26
communications interfaces 2-18 connecting sense output 4-26
RS–232 2-19 connection description dialog box 8-6
RS–422 2-19 conventions
Wiegand 2-19 typographical 1-5
communications port control commands 7-6 to 7-7 CRC
communications port parameters 7-19 See cyclic redundancy check
communications protocol 8-19 CRC calculation 6-14 to 6-17
status 7-20, 7-21 current requirements 2-17
communications protocols current, standby operating 2-17
basic protocol 6-4 current, worst case maximum 2-17
basic protocol command response 6-8 cyclic redundancy check 6-4
basic protocol reader transmission 6-5
ECP host response 6-5 D
error correcting protocol 6-4 data inquiry protocol 7-31
error correcting protocol format 6-5 data mode 7-3, 7-5
communications requirements 2-16 date
communications cables set 7-8
host DB25 connector 4-8, 4-23
computer cables 2-20 DB9 connector 4-8, 4-23
configuration label 8-3 DC power supply 4-7
configuration labeling 8-3 default operating parameters 7-41
configuring default parameters 8-4
appended tag data 8-13 disable
communications protocol 8-19 ATA 7-15
ID separation 8-13 automatic periodic RF status report 7-45
parameters 8-12 to 8-19 buffer control mode 7-31
port communication parameters 8-18 eATA 7-16
radio frequency 8-15 echo mode 7-33
reports 8-13 eGo 7-15
reset reader 8-14 eGo Plus Tag initialization during multi-tag sort 7-14
RF transmission 8-15 eGo tag initialization 7-14
continuous 8-16 fifth alternate group select 7-17
host controlling 8-16 fifth alternative group select 7-17
vehicle detector controlling 8-15 fourth alternate group select 7-16
sense inputs 8-17 IAG 7-16
sense output devices 8-17 multi-tag sort 7-14
serial port communications 8-18 second alternate group select 7-15
configuring the Encompass 4 Reader 8-3 to 8-21 SeGo 7-16
connecting tag translation mode 7-13
AC power 4-6 third alternate group select 7-16
colored-wire pair cable 4-9, 4-24 Wiegand mode 7-13
colored-wire pair cable for RS–422 4-25 display
colored-wire pair cable for Wiegand 4-26 appended information status 7-20
communications 4-23 boot checksum 7-28
bench testing 4-7 communications port parameters 7-19
required materials 4-7, 4-23 communications protocol status 7-20, 7-21
DC power 4-7 DSP board Actel version 7-18
Encompass 4 Reader to the PC 4-23 dual-frame processing mode 7-27
power supply 4-22 echo status 7-27
reader to PC 4-23 flash checksum 7-28
RS–232 interface 4-8, 4-23 hardware configuration information 7-18
RS–422 interface 4-10, 4-25 input status change report options 7-28
sense input circuits 4-27 operating mode status 7-29
sense output circuits 4-27 periodic check tag status 7-28

4
 Index

power fail bit 7-18 second alternate group select 7-15

presence input status 7-24 SeGo 7-16
reader ID number 7-19 tag translation mode 7-14
RF status 7-23 third alternate group select 7-16
RF transceiver FPGA version 7-18 Wiegand mode 7-13
RF transceiver I filter chip version 7-18 Encompass 4 1-3
RF transceiver Q filter chip version 7-18 Encompass 4 Reader
RF0 filter status 7-25 back of 4-13
selected check tag option 7-28 description 1-6
software version 7-18 end-of-line delay 7-6
Wiegand mode status 7-26 error correcting protocol 7-30
Wiegand retransmit interval 7-26 See also ECP
display buffer control status 7-27 error correcting protocol format
display tag translation mode status 7-26 reader transmissions 6-5
display time and date 7-8 error correcting protocol timeout 7-30
download mode 7-4 error messages 9-3
dry contact closure 2-19 error transaction 6-14
DSP board Actel version 7-18
dual-frame processing F
mode 7-27 failure conditions
dual-protocol 1-3 host addressed 6-13
reader addressed 6-12
E failure conditions, host-addressed
echo mode 7-33 asynchronous message/command message collision 6-13
echo status 7-27 illegal or wrong sequence number 6-13
ECP receive timeout 6-13
reliability 6-14 transmission timeout 6-13
timeout 6-11 failure conditions, reader addressed
See also error correcting protocol asynchronous message/command message collision 6-13
eGo License Plate Tag 3-7 illegal command 6-12
eGo Plus License Plate Tag 3-5 illegal sequence number 6-12
eGo Plus LPT installation procedures 3-13 receive timeout 6-13
eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag 3-5 transmission timeout 6-13
eGo Plus Sticker Tag 1-5, 3-4 wrong sequence number 6-12
eGo Plus Tag 3-3 fax number, support 9-7
eGo Windshield Sticker Tag 3-6 FCC internet site 1-7
eGo/eGo Plus FCC license
operating range 7-39 See licensing requirements
electrical requirements 2-16 flash checksum 7-28
current flow control option 7-31
power cables frequency separation 2-12
enable
ATA 7-15 G
automatic periodic RF status report 7-46 gate 2-13
buffer control mode 7-32
data inquiry protocol 7-31 H
eATA 7-16 hardware configuration information 7-18
echo mode 7-33 hardware configuration string 7-44
eGo 7-15 Hyper Terminal 4-7, 4-23
eGo Plus Tag initialization during multi-tag sort 7-14 Hyper Terminal main screen 8-8
eGo Tag initialization 7-14
fifth alternate group select 7-17 I
fifth alternative group select 7-17 IAG 1-3, 3-3
fourth alternate group select 7-17 see also Inter-Agency Group
IAG 7-16 IAG RF attenuation 7-39
multi-tag sort 7-14 ID filtering commands 7-10 to 7-17

5
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

ID separation 8-13 metallized coating on windshield 3-13, 3-21

illegal sequence number 6-13 mirror post, attached to headliner 3-17
input inversion option 7-44 mirror post, high 3-8, 3-16
input status 7-23 mirror post, low 3-8, 3-16
input status change report options 7-45 mixed population tags 2-3
input/output circuits 2-19 mounting antenna 4-20
input/output module 1-6 mounting reader 4-12
installation procedures multiple reader sites 2-12
blind rivets 3-26
eGo Plus LPT 3-13 N
eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag 3-11 NEMA 2-16
eGo Plus Sticker Tag 3-9
eGo Windshield Sticker Tag 3-17 O
installing antenna operating mode status 7-29
on a round pole operating modes
procedures 4-20 command mode 7-4
overhead 4-21 data mode 7-3
procedures 4-21 download mode 7-4
installing reader 4-3 to 4-29 organization, system guide 1-3
additional testing materials 4-4 output control 7-33
on a round pole 4-12 output control, predefined 7-34
procedures 4-12 output pulse duration 7-41
on wall or ceiling 4-16 output status 7-22
procedures 4-16
optional accessories 4-4 P
required materials 4-3 parameters
wall or ceiling 4-16 configuring 8-12
installing tags default operating 8-4
alternate mounting locations 3-25 operating 5-4
installation procedures 3-26 parity 7-6, 7-7
eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag 3-11 patch antenna 1-6
eGo Plus Sticker Tag 3-7 periodic check tag
eGo Windshield Sticker Tag 3-15 status 7-28
license plate-mount tag 3-21 periodic RF status report 7-45
Intellitag 1-3 phone number dialog box 8-7
Inter-Agency Group 1-3, 3-3 pin assignments, signal to host 4-8, 4-23
see also IAG polarization 2-5, 2-10
International Organization for Standardization 1-3 See also alignment
ISO 1-3, 3-3 port configuration parameters 8-18
IT2000 3-3 power cables 2-16
power fail bit 7-18, 7-40
J power failure flag 5-5
junction box 2-16 power supply 1-6
presence input status 7-24
L presence without tag report option 7-42
lane configuration 2-12, 2-15 Procomm Plus 4-7, 4-23
center island 2-13 program download 5-5
overhead 2-14 considerations 5-5
parking garage with ticket island 2-14 procedures 5-5
large truck, no inside mirror 3-9 purpose, system guide 1-3
licensing requirements 1-7
line of sight 2-6, 2-11 R
load default operating parameters 7-41 radio frequency 8-15
See also RF
M read zone 2-11, 4-29
marketing support 9-7 fine-tuning 8-19
metallized coating 2-8, 3-8, 3-15 adjusting sensitivity range 8-21

6
 Index

lowering output power 8-20 RF transceiver Q filter chip version 7-18

physically adjust antenna 8-20 RF transmission 8-15
physically adjust reader 8-20 continuous 8-16
marking 4-29 host control 8-16
sample 4-31 vehicle detector control 8-16
reader RF0
configuring 8-3 filter status 7-25
description 1-6 RF-by-input control 7-35
how it works 1-6 RS–232 interface 2-19
installing RS–422 interface 2-19
on a round pole
required materials 4-12 S
on wall or ceiling second successful tag read screen 8-12
required materials 4-16 Security Sticker Tag
operating modes 7-3 removing 3-12
repair 9-6 SeGo 1-3, 3-3
specifications B-3 select
reader control function commands 7-29 to 7-45 ATA operating range 7-38
reader ID number 7-19, 7-29 basic protocol 7-30
reader logic board 1-6 baud rate 7-6
reader mode control commands 7-5 eGo/eGo Plus operating range 7-39
reader status commands 7-18 to 7-29 error correcting protocol 7-30
real-time clock commands 7-7 to 7-8 error correcting protocol timeout 7-30
receive timeout 6-13 flow control option 7-31
removing eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag 3-12 input inversion option 7-44
removing tags input status change report option 7-45
eGo Plus Sticker Tag 3-10 parity 7-7
eGo Windshield Sticker Tag 3-18 presence without tag report option 7-42
exterior 3-26 RF control algorithm 7-42
report RF operating frequency 7-35, 7-39
buffered handshakes 7-29 RF timeout period 7-43
reports 8-13 RF-by-input control 7-35
reset stop bits 7-6
power fail bit 7-40 unique ID code criteria 7-11
reader 7-34 valid ID code criteria for RF channel0 7-11
uniqueness 7-12 selected check tag option 7-28
reset reader 8-14 sense input/output circuits, sample 4-27
RF sense inputs 8-17
attenuation 7-38 sense output devices 8-17
control 7-34 serial number 7-44
control algorithm 7-42 serial port communications 8-18
operating frequency 7-39 set
signals IAG RF attenuation 7-39
existing interference with 2-16 output pulse duration 7-41
reflection, refraction, and diffraction 2-15 reader ID number 7-29
status 7-23 RF attenuation 7-38
timeout period 7-43 serial number 7-44
See also radio frequency uniqueness timeout 7-12
RF module 1-6 Wiegand retransmit interval 7-15
RF operating frequency 7-35 set date 7-8
RF signal set time 7-7
electrical interference 2-16 shipping carton contents 4-3
reflection, refraction, and diffraction 2-15 shipping carton label 8-3
RF transceiver FPGA version 7-18 sign-on message 5-6, 8-9
RF transceiver I filter chip version 7-18 site layout 2-8

7
Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

site plan 2-3 tag read capability

site plan, developing 2-3 to 2-20 verifying 8-10
software commands 7-3 tag translation mode
software version 7-18 status 7-26
software-related information 5-3 tape installation 3-26
startup 5-5 Technical Support 1-7
stop bits 7-6 technical support 1-7, 9-6
store hardware configuration string 7-44 terminal emulation software
successful tag read screen 8-11 starting 8-6
Super eGo 1-3, 3-3 using to configure parameters 8-5
switch to testing
command mode 7-5 Encompass 4 Reader 4-10
data mode 7-5 pre-installation 4-5
system description 1-5 using audible circuit tester 4-5
system guide ticket island 2-14
audience 1-3 time
organization 1-3 set 7-7
purpose 1-3 time and date
display 7-8
T timing and synchronization 6-11
tag traffic flow 2-11
choosing, installing, and removing 3-3 transmission formats, 7-9
compatible 1-6 transmission timeout 6-13
compatible types 3-3 transmit
installing buffer entry 7-5
alternate mounting locations transmit all ID codes 7-10
required materials 3-25 troubleshooting 9-3, 9-3 to 9-6
ATA interior tags remedies 9-4
required materials 3-18 symptoms 9-4
ATA license plate tags typographical conventions 1-5
required materials 3-21
ATA-mode tags 3-18 V
eGo Plus License Plate Tag 3-13 vehicle detector 8-16
eGo Plus LPT verify
required materials 3-13 communications 8-8
eGo Plus Sticker Tags 3-7 tag read capability 8-10
eGo Windshield Sticker Tags 3-15
license-plate mounted 3-21 W
windshield sticker tags Warning
required materials 3-16 minimum safe distance for maintenance personnel, iv, v
windshield-type sticker tags Web site, support 9-6
required materials 3-8 Wiegand 3-3
models 3-3 interface 2-19
positioning mode 7-13
ATA-mode tag 3-19 mode status 7-26
eGo Plus LPT 3-13 retransmit interval 7-15, 7-26
eGo Plus Sticker Tag 3-8 wiring tables C-3
eGo Windshield Sticker Tag 3-16 wrong sequence number 6-12, 6-13
license plate-mount tag 3-22
reading mixed population 2-3
removing
ATA/ISO tag 3-21
types 3-3
tag decoder 1-6
tag positions 2-7